2009 Pontiac G3 Owner Manual M...On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès de...

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1Head Restraints ......................................... 1-2Front Seats ............................................... 1-4Rear Seats ............................................... 1-8Safety Belts ............................................. 1-14Child Restraints ....................................... 1-32Airbag System ......................................... 1-58Restraint System Check ............................ 1-72

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-6Windows ................................................. 2-11Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-13Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-16Mirrors .................................................... 2-32OnStar® System ...................................... 2-34Storage Areas ......................................... 2-37Sunroof .................................................. 2-38

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-18Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-23Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-38

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-28

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-42Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-42Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-49Tires ...................................................... 5-50Appearance Care ..................................... 5-79Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-86Electrical System ...................................... 5-87Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-93

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Pontiac G3 Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name G3, are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. GM reserves the right to make changes afterthat time without further notice. For vehicles first sold inCanada, substitute the name “General Motors of CanadaLimited” for Pontiac Motor Division wherever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may or may not beon your specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning to end to learn aboutthe vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:


1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

IndexTo quickly locate information about the vehicle, use theindex in the back of the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20811656 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsA circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not dothis,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were to ignorethe warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoidor reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

Many times, this damage would not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see yourowner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see aservice manual for additional instructions or information.

iii

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbols that may be found onthe vehicle and what they mean. For more informationon the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv

Head Restraints ...............................................1-2Front Seats ......................................................1-4

Manual Seats ................................................1-4Seat Height Adjuster .......................................1-5Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6

Rear Seats .......................................................1-8Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) ...........................1-8Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) ....................1-11

Safety Belts ...................................................1-14Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-14How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-20Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-28Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32

Child Restraints .............................................1-32Older Children ..............................................1-32Infants and Young Children ............................1-36Child Restraint Systems .................................1-39Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) ......................................1-44

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat Position ....................................1-51

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position ............................1-54

Airbag System ...............................................1-58Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-62What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-63How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-63What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64Passenger Sensing System ............................1-65Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-70Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-71Restraint System Check ..................................1-72

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-72Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-73

Section 1 Seats and Restraint System

1-1

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{CAUTION:

With head restraints that are not installed andadjusted properly, there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in acrash. Do not drive until the head restraints for alloccupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraintis at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.This position reduces the chances of a neck injury ina crash.

1-2

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the headrestraint, press the button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraint down.

Push down on the head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are not designed to be removed.

The rear seats have head rests that are adjustableup and down.

1-3

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Pull up and hold the barlocated under the front ofthe seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.Then try to move the seat with your body, to make surethe seat is locked into place.

1-4

Seat Height Adjuster

Turn the knob located onthe outboard side of theseat cushion to adjust theheight of the driver seatcushion.

Turn the knob forward to raise the height of the seatcushion and rearward to lower it.

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with frontseat manual lumbar, theadjustment lever is locatedon the outboard side ofthe seatback.

Move the lever up or down to one of its three positions toincrease or decrease the lumbar support. The highestposition provides the most support and the lowestposition provides the least support.

1-5

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The leverused to operate them is located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position, thenrelease the lever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

To return the seatback to an upright position:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to theseatback and the seatback will return to the uprightposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

1-6

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is inmotion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,the safety belts cannot do their job when reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it willnot be against your body. Instead, it will be in frontof you. In a crash, you could go into it, receivingneck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,the belt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle ismoving.

1-7

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)

Folding the SeatbacksThe rear seatbacks can be folded down to increasecargo space.

To fold down the seatbacks:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts stillfastened may cause damage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and returnthem to their normal stowed position before foldinga rear seat.

1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safety beltguide by pulling it through the slot.

2. Push the head restraints all the way down.

3. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the redbutton on the buckle.

1-8

4. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckleby inserting the ignition key into the slot in the minibuckle, pressing the release button, and allowingthe belt to retract.

5. Pull up the release knob located on top of either ofthe rear seatbacks.

6. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.

1-9

To return the seatback to the upright position:

1. Hook the safety belts into the safety belt guide.

2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its originalposition.

{CAUTION:


3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of theseatbacks until it latches securely in the fullyupright position.

4. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the minibuckle, pull it from the retractor.

5. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety belt strapinto the mini-buckle until the mechanism clicks. Makesure the strap is not twisted. The sliding latch platewill face the front of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properlyattached, or twisted will not provide the protectionneeded in a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached, and arenot twisted.

6. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safety beltguide.

1-10

Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)

Folding the Rear SeatsThe rear seats can be folded to increase cargo space.

To fold the rear seats:

1. Lower the head restraints completely.

2. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the redbutton on the buckle.

3. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle byinserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,pressing the release button, and allowing it to retract.

4. Pull up the release knob, located on the top of theseatbacks, and fold the seatbacks forward and down.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts andreturn them to their normal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

5. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt in thecenter seating position out of the space betweenthe seatbacks and the seat cushion so they are notin the way as the seat is being folded.

1-11

6. Firmly pull the release handles on the rear side ofthe seat cushion to unlock the seat cushion.

7. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.

8. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraint tokeep the rear seat secure.

Unfolding the SeatsTo return the rear seats to the normal seating position:

1. Unclip the hook from the front seat head restraint.

2. Position the buckles in back of the seat latcheswhen moving the rear seats to the sitting position.

1-12

Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle or rearseat locking mechanism can occur if the safety beltand buckles are pinched under the rear seatcushion. Do not place the safety belt and buckleson the floor under the rear seat cushion whenthe rear seat is put back to the sitting position.

3. Push the seat cushion down to its original positionuntil it latches securely. Try to pull up on the seat tomake sure it is locked in place.

4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seatingpositions into the retaining clips.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properlyattached, or twisted will not provide the protectionneeded in a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached, and arenot twisted.

5. Lift the seatbacks up and push them back to theiroriginal latched positions.

6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboard seatingpositions from the retaining clips.

1-13

7. Return the safety belt buckles and the center seatsafety belt to their original position between the rearseatback and the seat cushion. Make sure the strapsof the safety belt and buckles are not twisted.

8. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the minibuckle, pull it from the retractor.

{CAUTION:


9. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of theseatbacks until they latch securely in the fullyupright position.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis section of the manual describes how to usesafety belts properly. It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannotbe worn properly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, theinjuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or be ejected from thevehicle. You and your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

1-14

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle thesafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-26for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without safety belts, they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

1-15

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-16

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-17

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-18

Questions and Answers About SafetyBelts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-19

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-36. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and youwould be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

1-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forward toomuch, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly against your body.

1-21


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

1-22


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-23


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes overan armrest like this. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. Thebelt force would then be applied on the abdomen,not on the pelvic bones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goesunder the armrests.

1-24


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internal organs like yourliver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-25


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your bodycould move too far forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-26


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In acrash, you would not have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, makeit straight so it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

1-27

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehicle have alap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating position with a detachablesafety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see RearSeat Operation (Sedan) on page 1-8 or Rear SeatOperation (Hatchback) on page 1-11 for instructionon reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explain how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulledout all the way, the child restraint locking featuremay be engaged. If this happens, let the beltgo back all the way and start again.

3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt thelatch plate and keep pulling until it can be buckled.

1-28

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,check if the correct buckle is being used.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-32.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,move it to the height that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in thissection for instructions on use and important safetyinformation.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

1-29

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should return to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of theway. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damagecan occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for thedriver and right front passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A) andmove the height adjusterto the desired position.

After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try tomove it down without pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked into position.

1-30

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety belt pretensioners forfront outboard occupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safetybelt assembly. They can help tighten the safety beltsduring the early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensionersactivate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for the vehicle’s safetybelt system. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 1-73.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-31

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender willbe long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, donot let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat itis made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach itto the regular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-32

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat, state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulderbelt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, thenreturn to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for thelength of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It shouldnever be worn over the abdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children and infantsare safer when properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-33

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safetybelt. The safety belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only one person at a time.

1-34

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with theshoulder belt behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. The child couldmove too far forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-35

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Every time infants andyoung children ride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strike otherpeople, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a child while riding in avehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is not possible to hold itduring a crash. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-36

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in theright front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint

CAUTION: (Continued)


in a rear seat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

1-37

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury duringa crash, infants need complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is not fully developedand its head weighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants should always be secured inrear-facing child restraints.

1-38

{CAUTION:

A young child’s hip bones are still so small thatthe vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remainlow on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,young children should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with theseating surface against theback of the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in acrash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

1-39

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-40

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash ifthe child restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in thevehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions that came withthat child restraint and the instructions in thismanual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may be onthe restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important, soif they are not available, obtain a replacement copyfrom the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properly following theinstructions that came with that child restraint.

1-41

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children and child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding ina forward-facing child seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.



Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 foradditional information.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

1-42

There are a couple of things you need to know aboutusing child restraints in your rear seat:

If you use a child restraintin the center rear seatingposition (A), the safetybelts and the child restraintLATCH anchors for therear outside seatingpositions (B) will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure child restraintsor have passengers ride in the rear outside seatingpositions.

If you use two childrestraints (A) in therear outside seatingpositions, the safety beltfor the center rear seatposition (B) will not beaccessible.

Therefore, you will not be able to secure a childrestraint or have a passenger ride in the center rearseating position.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to securethe child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

1-43

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint during drivingor in a crash. This system is designed to make installationof a child restraint easier. The LATCH system usesanchors in the vehicle and attachments on the childrestraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint isproperly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual. When installing a childrestraint with a top tether, you must also use either thelower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.The child restraint manufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use the child restraint and itsattachments. The following explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints havelower anchors and attachments or top tether anchorsand attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

1-44

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraintto the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in orderto reduce the forward movement and rotation of the childrestraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether are designedfor use with or without the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, onecan be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not akit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions with toptether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two loweranchors.

1-45

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position with loweranchors has two labels,near the crease betweenthe seatback and theseat cushion.

Hatchback models may have zippers over the loweranchor areas. If so, unzip the seat cover belowthe labels to access each lower anchor.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors, thetop tether anchor symbolis located on the cover.

For sedan models, the top tether anchors are locatedunder the covers behind the rear seat on the filler panel.Pull open the cover to access the top tether anchors.Be sure to use an anchor located on the same sideof the vehicle as the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Sedan

1-46

For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B) arelocated in the rear cargo area, attached to the backwall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pull the front part ofthe plastic cover to access the top tether anchors.

Remove the cargo shade before installing the top tether.The cargo shade should remain off while the top tether isin use. Be sure to use an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additionalinformation.

Hatchback

1-47

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached toanchors, the child restraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, the child could beseriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with the childrestraint and the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Do not attach more than one child restraint to asingle anchor. Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor could cause the anchoror attachment to come loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could be injured. To reducethe risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle anyunused safety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed.

1-48

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rubagainst the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damagethese parts. If necessary, move buckled safetybelts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety beltbuckled. This could damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to itsstowed position, before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to thelower anchors. If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on

the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.Refer to the child restraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Flip the cover to access the top tether

anchors.2.3. For hatchback models, remove the cargo

shade before installing the top tether. Thecargo shade should remain off while the toptether is in use.

2.4. Raise the headrest or head restraint if thedesired seating position has an adjustableheadrest or head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 1-2.

1-49

2.5. Route and tighten the top tether according toyour child restraint instructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a headrest or headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether under the headrestor head restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe headrest or headrestraint and in betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

1-50

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionWhen securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If yousecure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses atop tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-44 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

If you need to install more than one child restraint in therear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-42.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or aroundthe restraint. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

1-51

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If you find that the latch plate will not go fully intothe buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.Make sure the release button is positioned soyou would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-52

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are using a forward-facingchild restraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions regardingthe use of the top tether. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tetheris attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

1-53

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionThis vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place tosecure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-42.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing systemwhich is designed to turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-65 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-27 for more informationon this, including important safety information.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.


1-54


Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 foradditional information.

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If achild restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses atop tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-44 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), theoff indicator on the passenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-27.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-55

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

1-56

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are using a forward-facingchild restraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.


If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator will come on and stayon when the vehicle is started.

1-57

If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol isnot lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

The vehicle may have the following airbags:

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right frontpassenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the wordAIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closestto the door.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou are not wearing your safety belt — even if youhave airbags. Airbags are designed to work withsafety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbagsare not designed to deploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your only restraint. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-62.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things inside thevehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag for thatperson.

1-58

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blinkof an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close tothe airbag, as you would be if you were sitting onthe edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safetybelts help keep you in position before and during acrash. Always wear your safety belt, even withairbags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep against thedoor or side windows in seating positions withseat-mounted airbags.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system is designedfor them. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in your vehicle. Toread how, see Older Children on page 1-32 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-36.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26for more information.

1-59

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

1-60

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags forthe driver and right front passenger, they are in theside of the seatbacks closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an airbag,the airbag might not inflate properly or it might forcethe object into that person causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anything between anoccupant and an airbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheel hub or on or nearany other airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that block the inflationpath of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-61

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are usedto predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

The vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted sideimpact airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-58.Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflatein moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mountedside impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.

1-62

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that isstruck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bywhat the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mountedside impact airbags, deployment is determined by thelocation and severity of the side impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing thebag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, theairbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbagmodules in the side of the front seatbacks closest tothe door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impactairbags distribute the force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant’s upper body.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is nottoward those airbags. See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 1-62 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

1-63

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize the airbags inflated. Somecomponents of the airbag module may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leavingthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe to do so.If you have breathing problems but cannot get outof the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seek medical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlockthe doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on thehazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate. Youcan lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turnthe hazard warning flashers off by using the controls forthose features.

1-64

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additionalwindshield breakage may also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts for theairbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash. SeeVehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7-16and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that the airbagsystem will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the rightfront passenger position. The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible, near the clock, located in thecenter of the instrument panel, when the vehicle isstarted.

The word ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off willbe visible, during the system check.

When the system check is complete, either the wordON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-27.

United States Canada

1-65

The passenger sensing system will turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) under certain conditions. The driverairbags are not affected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger seat. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics, children are safer whenproperly secured in a rear seat in the correct childrestrain for their weight and size.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facingchild restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,who are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even if the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), nosystem is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint ina rear seat.

1-66

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant is present in arear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-27.

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) anytimethe system senses that a person of adult size is

sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. Whenthe passenger sensing system has allowed theairbag or airbags to be enabled, the on symbol will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbagsare active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26for more information, including important safetyinformation.

1-67

If the On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraintIf a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.

3. Remove any additional items from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directionsprovided by the child restraint manufacturer andrefer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right FrontSeat Position on page 1-54.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn thevehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, tomake sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seat cushion.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, andcheck with your dealer/retailer.

1-68

If the On Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

If this happens, use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and enable the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped):

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional material from the seat, suchas blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered onthe seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for two to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

1-69

Additional Factors Affecting SystemOperationSafety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing system maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inthe Index for additional information about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing system operates. We recommendthat you not use seat covers or other aftermarketequipment other than any that GM has approved foryour specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect howthe system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat orbetween the passenger seat cushion and seatbackmay interfere with the proper operation of thepassenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. Thereare parts of the airbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned offand the battery is disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

1-70

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affectthe operation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.The passenger sensing system may not operateproperly if the original seat trim is replaced withnon-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also

interfere with the operation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either prevent proper deploymentof the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-65.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get myvehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-71

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts that might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn orfrayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-26 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-82.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-26 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbag coverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-63. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

1-72

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in yourvehicle. A damaged restraint system may notproperly protect the person using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need newsafety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies that were used during anycrash may have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have the safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was beingused during a crash, you may need new LATCH systemparts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thesafety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), wasnot being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if thevehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle is started, or while you aredriving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26.

1-73

✍ NOTES

1-74

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-4Doors and Locks .............................................2-6

Door Locks ....................................................2-6Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-6Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-7Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-7Trunk (Sedan) ................................................2-8Liftgate (Hatchback) ......................................2-10

Windows ........................................................2-11Manual Windows ..........................................2-12Power Windows ............................................2-12Sun Visors ...................................................2-13

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-13Immobilizer ..................................................2-13Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-14Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-15

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17Starting the Engine .......................................2-18

Engine Heater ..............................................2-19Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-20Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-24Parking Brake ..............................................2-26Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) ......2-27Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-28Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......2-29Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-30Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-31

Mirrors ...........................................................2-32Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-32Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-32Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-33Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-33Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-33

OnStar® System .............................................2-34Storage Areas ................................................2-37

Glove Box ...................................................2-37Cupholders ..................................................2-37Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-38

Sunroof .........................................................2-38

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition, doors and all otherlocks.

The key has a key code tag that the dealer/retailer orqualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store thisinformation in a safe place, not in your vehicle.

2-2

Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizerdesigned to protect your car against theft. If so, onlykeys with the correct electronic code can be used to startthe vehicle. See Immobilizer Operation on page 2-14for additional information. If a replacement key or anadditional key is needed, it must be purchased fromyour dealer/retailer or certified locksmith.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowyweather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left orright, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, seeyour dealer/retailer or a qualified technician forservice.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functionswork up to 65 feet (20 m) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

The following functions may be available if the vehiclehas RKE:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all of the doors. If all of thedoors and the trunk or liftgate are closed, the hazardlamps flash once and the horn will sound to indicate thatlocking has occurred and the theft-deterrent system isactive.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock all of the doors.The hazard lamps flash twice to indicate that unlockinghas occurred and that the theft-deterrent system isdeactivated. If the doors are not opened within30 seconds the doors will lock again.

3 (Panic) (Hatchback): Press to sound the panicalarm. The hazard lamps will flash and the panic alarmwill stay on for about 30 seconds. Press any of thebuttons on the transmitter to turn off the alarm.

V (Remote Trunk Release) (Sedan): Press and holdfor approximately one second to open the trunk.

The LED light (A) on the transmitter flashes when thebuttons on the transmitter are pressed. If the light doesnot flash see “Battery Replacement” later in this section.

The buttons do not operate and the theft-deterrentsystem does not activate if the key is in the ignition.

Hatchback Sedan

2-4

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmed to the vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased and programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmittersno longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to five transmittersprogrammed to it.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the LED on the transmitter doesnot flash when you press the buttons.

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touchany of the circuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover andopen the cover of the transmitter.

2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover andcarefully turn the circle cover of the transmitterunit toward open.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Useone three-volt, CR1620, or equivalent, type battery.

5. Turn the circle cover of the transmitter unit towardclose and put the transmitter unit in the cover.

6. Put the two halves back together and replace thescrew. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so waterwill not get in.

7. Test the transmitter operation.

2-5

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can easily

open the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chance of being thrownout of the vehicle in a crash is increased ifthe doors are not locked. So, all passengersshould wear safety belts properly and thedoors should be locked whenever the vehicleis driven.

• Young children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay be unable to get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Always lock the vehicle wheneverleaving it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlockeddoor when you slow down or stop your vehicle.Locking your doors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4.

To manually unlock the front doors from the outside,insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.To manually lock the doors from the outside, insertthe key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.

All doors, except for the driver door, can be locked bypushing down the manual door lock and then closingthe door. On vehicles with power locks, the driver doorcan only by locked from the outside by using the keyor the optional RKE transmitter.

From the inside, all of the doors can be locked andunlocked by pushing or pulling the manual doorlock located on each door.

Central Door Unlocking SystemThe vehicle may be equipped with the central doorunlocking system. This system is activated fromthe driver door.

From the outside, lock or unlock all the doors by usingeither the key or the RKE transmitter, if equipped.From the inside, lock or unlock all the doors by usingthe driver door lock switch.

2-6

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors, trunk,or liftgate is not closedproperly while the ignitionis on, the door ajar light onthe instrument panel comeson and stays on until thedoors are closed.

Rear Door Security Locks

The vehicle has reardoor security locks oneach rear door thatprevents passengersfrom opening the reardoors from the inside.

Using the Rear Door Security Lock1. Move the lever up to lock.2. Close the door.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the other rear door lock.

Notice: Pulling the inside door handle whilethe rear door security locks are engaged coulddamage your vehicle. Do not pull the inside doorhandle while the rear door security locks areengaged.The rear doors on the vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside while this feature is in use.

Opening a Rear Door When theSecurity Lock is On1. Unlock the door from the inside.2. Open the door from the outside.

If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or olderchildren who ride in the rear will not be able to open therear door from the inside.

Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the

door from the outside.2. Move the lever down to unlock.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the other rear door lock.

The rear door locks can now be locked and unlockednormally.

2-7

Trunk (Sedan)

{CAUTION:

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is drivenwith the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, ortrunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or under the

instrument panel.• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-30.

To open the trunk on a sedan from outside of thevehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn thekey clockwise or use the RKE transmitter, if equipped.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4.

Remote Trunk Release

If the vehicle has a trunkrelease button located onthe driver door, the trunkcan be opened from insidethe vehicle by pressing therelease button.

When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensureit fully latches.

Trunk Release Button

2-8

If the vehicle has a trunkrelease lever located onthe outboard side of thedriver seat, the trunk canbe opened from inside thevehicle by pulling therelease lever.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located on the underside of the trunk lid.This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull therelease handle down to open the trunk from the inside.

Trunk Release Lever

2-9

Liftgate (Hatchback)

{CAUTION:

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is drivenwith the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, ortrunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on or under the

instrument panel.• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-30.

To open the liftgate on a hatchback from outside of thevehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn itcounterclockwise or use the RKE transmitter, if equipped.Then pull up the handle above the license plate to openthe liftgate.

When closing the liftgate, close from the center toensure it fully latches.

To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinderand turn it clockwise or use the RKE transmitter,if equipped.

The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by thecentral door unlocking system or RKE transmitter,if equipped. See Central Door Unlocking System onpage 2-6 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-4.

2-10

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

2-11

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close each window.

The rear windows do not open fully.

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys isdangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closing window.Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seat use thewindow lockout button to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

On vehicles with power windows, the switches arelocated on the driver door. In addition, each passengerdoor has a switch for its own window.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to use thepower windows. To lower the window, press and holdthe switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.Release the switch when the window reaches thedesired level.

2-12

Window Lockout

The window lockout islocated with the driverpower window switches.

Press the lockout button to stop the rear passengersfrom using the rear window switches. The driver canstill operate all the windows with the lockout on. Pressthe lockout button again to return to normal windowoperation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare you can swing down the sun visors.You can also remove them from the center mountand swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity MirrorThe vehicle has vanity mirrors located on the back ofthe sun visors. Swing down the sun visor to expose thevanity mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,they do not make it impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:


2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




2-13

Immobilizer OperationThe vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.

The immobilizer system prevents the vehicle frombeing started by an unauthorized person by isolatingthe power supply to the ignition system, the fuel pumpand the fuel injectors.

The system is automatically armed when the key isremoved from the ignition. You do not have to manuallyarm or disarm the system.

Your vehicle has a special key that works with thetheft-deterrent system. There is a transponder in the keyhead that is electronically coded. The correct key will startthe vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the engine. If yourkey is ever damaged, you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does notstart and the security light flashes or comes on, there maybe a problem with the theft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears tobe undamaged, try another key. At this time, you mayalso want to check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-88. If the engine still does not startwith the other key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See yourdealer/retailer who can have a new key made.

Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.If you lose or damage your keys, only a dealer/retailercan have new keys made.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you will be able to restart the engineif you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,is not working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by thetheft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

2-14

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent system.

The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lockthe doors using the key or the manual door lock. It armsonly when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the

trunk or liftgate.Make sure that the windows are closed, as thesystem can be armed even if the windows are open.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitterwill not arm the theft-deterrent system.

3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.• The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.• All of the doors will lock.• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and

the horn will sound.• The security light will flash continuously to

indicate that the theft-deterrent system is armed.The security light is located on the center ofthe instrument panel near the clock.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of thefollowing:

• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door usingthe key.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarmwhen a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.

If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of the following:


• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

− The LED light on the transmitter willflash once.

− All of the doors will unlock.− The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.

If the door is not opened or if the engine is not startedwithin 30 seconds after disarming the system usingthe transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lockand the theft-deterrent mode will rearm.

2-15

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened withoutusing the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter,the horn will sound and the lamps will flash for upto 30 seconds.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmIf the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated usingone of the following methods:

• Press one of the buttons on the remote keylessentry transmitter.


Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors andrearm the theft-deterrent system.

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf the hazard warning lamps flash once when you pressthe lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter,the theft-deterrent system alarm was activated whileyou were away.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fastor slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guidelineevery time you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

2-16

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch hasfour different positions.

{CAUTION:

On manual transmission vehicles, turning the keyto LOCK/OFF will lock the steering column andresult in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.This could cause a collision. If you need to turnthe engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn thekey only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in theignition could cause damage to the switch or breakthe key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all theway in, and turn it only with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.

LOCK/OFF: This position locks the steering wheel,ignition, shift lever and transmission. This is theonly position in which you can insert or remove the key.

The steering can bind with the wheels turned offcenter. If this happens, move the steering wheel fromright to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.

ACC/ACCESSORY: This position operates some of theelectrical accessories, such as the radio, but not theclimate control system.

ON/RUN: This position can be used to operate theelectrical accessories, and to display some instrumentpanel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when the engine is running. If youleave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off, the battery could be drained.You may not be able to start the vehicle if the batteryis allowed to drain for an extended period of time.

START: This is the position that starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN for driving. Do not turnthe key to START if the engine is running.

2-17

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).The engine will not start in any other position.To restart the engine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parkingbrake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor andstart the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition to START. When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed will go down as theengine gets warm.

Notice: Holding the key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause the battery to bedrained much sooner. And the excessive heat can

damage the starter motor. Wait about 15 secondsbetween each try to help avoid draining the batteryor damaging the starter.

2. If the engine does not start, wait about 15 secondsand try again. Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.When the engine has run about 10 seconds to warmup, the vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not run theengine at high speed when it is cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), letthe engine run for a few minutes to warm up.

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but thenstops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the same thing, butthis time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

Notice: The engine is designed to work withthe electronics in the vehicle. If electrical parts oraccessories are added, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

2-18

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provide easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine heater should be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Remove the extension cord from the trunk. Openthe hood and connect the electrical cord (A) withthe extension cord.

3. Plug the extension cord into a normal, grounded110-Volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet couldcause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind ofextension cord could overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug boththe extension cord and under hood electrical cord,and store them as they were before. This willkeep them away from moving engine parts,and prevent damage.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged independs on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer inthe area where you will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.

2-19

Automatic Transmission Operation

If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shiftlever is located on the console between the seats.

Movement between certain positions requires pushingthe release button on the front of the shifter.

P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is thebest position to use when you start the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shiftlever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-27.

Ensure that the shift lever is fully in P (Park) beforestarting the engine. The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control system. You have to applythe brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park) whenthe key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park)while holding the brake pedal down, see Shifting Out ofPark on page 2-28.

2-20

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.

When shifting from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), you needto apply the brake pedal and push the release buttonon the front of the shifter.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging the transmission, seeIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 4-17.

N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart the engine whilethe vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldmove very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drive gearwhile the engine is running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) withthe engine running at high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting the vehicle.

2-21

D4 (Automatic Overdrive): This position is for normaldriving.

When operating the vehicle in severe cold conditions,the transmission may be prevented from shifting intoD4 gear until the transmission fluid has warmed up toit’s operational temperature.

Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly or not shift gears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehicle that way, you coulddamage the transmission. Have the vehicle servicedright away. You can drive in 2 (Second) when you aredriving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and D4 (AutomaticOverdrive) for higher speeds until then.

2 (Second): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy. You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steepmountain roads, while using the brakes off and on.

Notice: Do not drive in 2 (Second) at speedsover 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage thetransmission. Use D4 (Automatic Overdrive) asmuch as possible. Do not shift into 2 (Second) unlessyou are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or youcan damage the engine.

1 (First): This position gives you even more power butlower fuel economy than 2 (Second). You can use iton very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in 1 (First), the transmission will not shiftinto first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission. The repair will not becovered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, donot spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

If there is a malfunction with the automatic transmission,the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLDindicator light will turn on or flash. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-32 or Hold Mode Light onpage 3-30.

Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

2-22

Hold ModeIf the vehicle’s transmission has hold mode, you canselect this mode to allow the automatic transmission tostay in a specific gear range.

Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turnon hold mode. Press the button again to turn off holdmode, and return to normal automatic transmissionoperation.

The HOLD light will light up on the instrument panelcluster. See Hold Mode Light on page 3-30.

When hold mode is activated, the transmission runs asfollows:

Selector Lever Position Gear Range

D4 Third Gear

2 Second Gear

1 First Gear

Hold Mode FeaturesWinter FunctionSelect hold mode while in D4 (Automatic Overdrive) or2 (Second) gear to help the vehicle maintain tractionon slippery road surfaces, such as snow, mud, or ice.

2-23

Manual Transmission Operation

Five-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete stopand it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever inN (Neutral) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on theaccelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth), the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press thebrake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press theclutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to N (Neutral).

N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle theengine.

2-24

R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal,lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift into R (Reverse).Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle ismoving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake,for parking the vehicle.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you couldlose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourselfor others. Do not shift down more than one gear ata time when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

If you have a manualtransmission, you mayhave an up-shift light.This light will show youwhen to shift to the nexthigher gear for the bestfuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions letyou. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowlyand shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light togo on and off if you quickly change the position ofthe accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.

2-25

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between the bucketseats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal downand pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

2-26

Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing thebutton on the shift lever and pushing the lever allthe way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave the vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with theengine running. The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could overheatand even catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brakeis firmly set before you leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold the brake pedal down.Then see if you can move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing the shift lock releasebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into P (Park).

2-27

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 2-27.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofP (Park) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkVehicles with an automatic transmission have a shiftinterlock system. You have to apply the brake pedalbefore you can shift from P (Park) when the ignitionis in the ON/RUN position. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-20.

If you cannot shift out of P (Park) while holding thebrake pedal down, try this:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.

3. Remove the hole cover from the shift lock slot byprying it off using a small, flat object. The shift lockrelease slot is located at the top of the shift lever.

2-28

4. Insert the key into the shift lock slot and press andhold the key.

5. Shift to N (Neutral).

6. Remove the key from the slot, insert the key intothe ignition and start the engine.

7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.

8. Apply and hold the brake pedal fully and releasethe parking brake.

9. Shift to the gear you want.

10. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking the Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Before leaving the vehicle, do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply theparking brake.

2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shiftlever into the gear position as stated below:

• When parking on level ground, place the shiftlever into N (Neutral).

• When parking downhill, place the shift lever inR (Reverse).

• When parking uphill, place the shift lever in1 (First).

3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,remove the key and release the clutch.

2-29

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things thatcan burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness and even death.



Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation

(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells or sounds strange ordifferent.

• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion ordamage.

• The vehicle’s exhaust system has beenmodified, damaged or improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openings in the vehiclebody from damage or after-marketmodifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspectedthat exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running in anenclosed area such as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

2-30

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. For more information,see Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle ifthe automatic transmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehiclewhen the engine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when it ison fairly level ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmission shift lever toP (Park), or the manual transmission shift lever toNeutral.

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will notmove. If the vehicle has an automatic transmission,see Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) onpage 2-27.

2-31

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move itfor a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror toavoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tabforward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.

Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors to see a little of the side of yourvehicle.

Controls for the outside manual mirrors are located nextto each mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damagewhen going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pushthe mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to the original position.

2-32

Outside Power Mirrors

The control is located onthe instrument panel, leftof the steering wheel.

The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to adjust themirrors.

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by moving theselector switch to L for the driver side mirror orR for the passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows located on the controlpad to move the mirror to the desired direction.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damagewhen going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pushthe mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,to return to its original position.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you couldhit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirroror glance over your shoulder before changinglanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with this feature:

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat themirrors. See “Rear Window and Outside Mirror Defogger”under Climate Control System on page 3-18 for moreinformation.

2-33

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed to make an automaticcall to OnStar Emergency advisors who can requestemergency services be sent to your location. If the keysare locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTARto have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStarHands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes goodfor 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.

OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Termsand Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance may not be available untilthe owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After thefirst prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthlyor annual subscription payment plan. If a payment planis not selected, the OnStar system and all services,including airbag notification and emergency services,may be deactivated and no longer available. For moreinformation visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.

Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.To check if this vehicle is able to provide the servicesdescribed below, or for a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) oronstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

2-34

OnStar Services Available with theSafe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into thevehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid MinutePackages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes goodfor 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked toa Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, orspeak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStarbutton or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling that uses minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local traffic reports, and stockquotes. Press the phone button and give a few simplevoice commands to browse through the various topics.See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in the continental U.S.

2-35

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record and transmit vehicleinformation. This information is automatically sent to anOnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags orAACN system deploy. This information usually includesthe vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding the crash that the vehiclewas involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehiclewas hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sendsOnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provideservices where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStar servicealso cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place wherethe wireless service provider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacity and reception whenthe service is needed, and technology that is compatiblewith the OnStar service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,or at all times.

Location information about the vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

The vehicle must have a working electrical system,including adequate battery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service at any particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to important parts of the vehicle ina crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wirelessphone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisorcannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons isred, the system may not be functioning properly. Pressthe OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If thelight appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and all services have beendeactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm thatthe OnStar equipment is active.

2-36

Storage Areas

The vehicle has shopping bag hooks on each frontseatback. Lift the headrest to access the hooks.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever to open it.

Cupholders

Two cupholders are located in the center instrumentpanel, below the climate control system. To usethe cupholder, push in on the cover, then pull it out.After use, push in the cupholder until it latches.

There is also a cupholder located in the rear of thecenter console.

2-37

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

For vehicles with this feature, the sunglasses storagecompartment is located above the driver’s door. To open,pull down and hold the upper part of the cover. Releasethe cover and the compartment will automatically close.

SunroofOn vehicles with thisfeature, the switch islocated on the headlinerbetween the sun visors.

The sunroof only operates when the ignition is turned toON/RUN. The sunroof can be opened to a vent positionor it can be opened all of the way.To open the sunroof to the vent position, openthe sunshade. Then press and hold the driver sideof the switch. To close the sunroof, press and hold thepassenger side of the switch until the sunroof reachesthe desired position.To fully open the sunroof, press and hold the passengerside of the switch. The sunshade opens with the sunroof.To close the sunroof, press and hold the driver side ofthe switch. The sunroof will stop if the switch is releasedduring operation. Close the sunshade manually.In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flowcan be adjusted by pushing and holding the switch untilthe sunroof moves to the desired position.The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehiclehas an electrical failure.

2-38

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14Fog Lamps ..................................................3-14Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15Dome Lamp .................................................3-15Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-15Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-17Clock ..........................................................3-17

Climate Controls ............................................3-18Climate Control System .................................3-18Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-22

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25Tachometer .................................................3-25Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-26Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-26Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-27Charging System Light ..................................3-28Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-28Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-30Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-30Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-30Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-31

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-34Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-35Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-35Cruise Control Light ......................................3-36Highbeam On Light .......................................3-36Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light ...3-36Door Ajar Light .............................................3-36Fuel Gage ...................................................3-37Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-37

Audio System(s) .............................................3-38AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-39Radio with CD ..............................................3-44Using an MP3 ..............................................3-51XM Radio Messages .....................................3-54Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-54Radio Reception ...........................................3-55Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback) .....................3-56Backglass Antenna (Sedan) ...........................3-56Multi-Band Antenna .......................................3-57

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.B. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-24.C. Clock on page 3-17.D. Hood Release on page 5-11.E. Horn on page 3-6.F. Audio System(s) on page 3-38.G. Climate Control System on page 3-18.

H. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter onpage 3-17.

I. Cupholders on page 2-37.J. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette

Lighter on page 3-17.K. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.L. Glove Box on page 2-37.

3-5

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flasher button is located to the rightof the climate control system on the sedan.

| Hazard Warning Flasher: Press to make thefront and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you are having trouble.Press the button again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals will not work.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.

The tilt wheel lever is located underneath the steeringcolumn slightly to the left.

Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up ordown. Pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt lever while driving.

3-6

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

P : Exterior Light Control

# : Fog Lamps, if equipped

Flash-to-Pass Feature.

Information for these features is on the pages following.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positions allowyou to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return byitself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and otherdrivers will not see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then checkthe fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-88.

3-7

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for this feature to work.

Push the turn signal lever away from you to turn the highbeams on.

This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on whilethe high beams are on and the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

Pull the lever towards you to return to low beams.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead thatyou want to pass.

Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever towards you untilthe high-beam headlamps come on, then releasethe lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Sedan shown

Hatchback shown

3-8

The lever is located on the right side of the steeringcolumn. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUNto operate the windshield wipers.

Move the lever to one of the following positions:

HI (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.

LO (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.

INT (Intermittent): Move to this position for a delayedwiping cycle. Turn the band on the windshield wipertoward FAST or SLOW for a shorter or longerdelay between wipes. The wiper speed can only beadjusted when the lever is in the INT position.

OFF: Turns the windshield wipers off.

Misting FunctionMove the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If morewipes are needed, hold the band toward INT longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before usingthem. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. If the blades become damaged,get new blades or blade inserts. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 5-49.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuitbreaker stops them until the motor cools.

Windshield WasherTo use this feature the ignition must be turned toON/RUN. Pull the windshield washer/wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield.

The spray continues until the lever is released.The wipers will run a few times and either stop orwill resume at the speed being used previously.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-31 forinformation on filling the windshield washer fluid.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

3-9

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

The vehicle may have a rear window wiper/washer.

Turn the rear wiper/washer band to operate therear window wiper/washer.

OFF: Turns the rear window wiper/washer off.

Z : Turns the rear wiper on for intermittent wipes.

Y : Sprays washer fluid onto the rear window and thewiper operates continuously.

The windshield washer reservoir is used for thewindshield and rear window. Check the fluid level ifeither washer is not working. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 5-31.

Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about24 mph (39 km/h) or more can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).

When the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if youhave a manual transmission, the cruise control turns off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannotdrive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use thecruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.

3-10

The cruise control buttons are located on the right sideof the steering wheel.

I / O (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control onor off.

RES+ (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make thevehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you arenot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press I / O to turn cruise control on.

2. Accelerate to the speed desired.

3. Press the SET− button and release it. The cruisecontrol light comes on in the instrument panelcluster to show that the cruise control is on.

4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.

3-11

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set to a desired speed and thenthe brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if you have amanual transmission, the cruise control shuts off.But it does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is going about 24 mph (39 km/h) ormore, briefly press the RES+ button. The vehicle returnsto the previously set speed and stays there.

If the RES+ button is held, the vehicle speed willcontinue to increase until the button is released or thebrake pedal is applied. Do not hold in the RES+ button,unless you want the vehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.

Press the SET− button, then release the button andthe accelerator pedal.

• Press the RES+ button. Hold it there until thedesired speed is reached, and then release it.To increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,briefly press the RES+ button and then releaseit. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The accelerate feature only works after the cruisecontrol is turned on by pressing the SET− button.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press the SET− button until the lower speeddesired is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press theSET− button. Each time this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicleslows down to the cruise control speed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you might have tostep on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’sspeed. When going downhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speeddown. When the brakes are applied the cruise controlturns off.

3-12

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutchpedal, if you have a manual transmission.

• Press I / O on the cruise control pad.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased whenthe cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has three positions:

3 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, togetherwith the following:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Parking Lamps

The headlamps automatically turn off when the ignitionkey is turned to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps,together with the taillamps, license plate lamp,and instrument panel lights.

OFF: Turns all the lamps off, except the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL).

Uplevel shown, Base similar

3-13

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime running lamps are required onall vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes the headlamps come on whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parkinglamp position.

• The parking brake is released.

An indicator light on instrument panel cluster comes onwhen the DRL system is on.

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights donot come on unless the exterior lamps control is turnedto the parking lamp or headlamp position.

The DRL system turns off when one of the followingconditions are met:• The ignition is off.• The parking brake is on.• The high-beam headlamps are on.• The low-beam headlamps are on.• The flash-to-pass feature is used.

The regular headlamp system should be used whenneeded.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, they are controlled bythe # band located on the middle of the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To use the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned toON/RUN and the low-beam headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.

Turn the band to # to turn the fog lamps on. The bandautomatically returns to its starting position whenreleased. The fog lamp indicator light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster. See Fog Lamp Light onpage 3-35.

3-14

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the band to # again.The fog lamp indicator light will go off.

The fog lamps will also turn off when the high-beamheadlamps are turned on. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will turn onagain.

Some localities have laws that require the headlampsto be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights.

The thumbwheel for thisfeature is located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering column.Turn the thumbwheelto brighten or dimthe lights.

Dome LampThe vehicle has a dome lamp.

ON: The light comes on and stays on.

O (Door): The light comes on when a door is opened.The light turns off when all the doors are closed.

OFF: The light remains off even when a door is opened.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect the vehicle’s batteryagainst drainage. If the exterior lamps control is leftin the ; or 2 position, the key is removed andthe driver door is opened, the lights will turn offautomatically.

If the key is removed and the driver door is openedwhile the dome lamp is on, the dome lamp will not turnoff automatically.

3-15

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.

The accessory power outlet is located next to theparking brake on the center console.

To use the accessory power outlet, remove theprotective cap. When not in use, always cover theoutlet with the protective cap. The accessory poweroutlet is operational when the ignition is turned toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and donot plug in equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experiencea problem, see your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to thevehicle can damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to followthe proper installation instructions included withthe equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by the warranty. Do not hangany type of accessory or accessory bracket from theplug because the power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

3-16

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray is located at the lower part of the centerinstrument panel. To remove the front ashtray forcleaning, open the ashtray fully, press in the retainingtab and pull the bin out.

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable itemsare put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage the vehicle. Never put flammable itemsin the ashtray.

The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the frontashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, push the cigarette lighter in all the wayand let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while itis heating.

ClockThere is a digital clock located in the center of theinstrument panel, above the center air outlets. When theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,the time is displayed in the digital clock. There arethree buttons for adjusting the digital clock:

H (Hour): Press once to go forward one hour. To goforward more than one hour, press and hold the buttonuntil the correct hour is reached.

M (Minute): Press once to go forward one minute.To go forward more than one minute, press and holdthe button until the correct minute is reached.

S (Set): Press to reset the time to the nearest hour.

For example, if the set button is pressed while the timeis between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.If this button is pressed while the time is between 8:30and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.

After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,reset the clock.

3-17

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle canbe controlled with this system.

A. Temperature ControlB. Fan ControlC. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Air Conditioning (A/C)E. RecirculationF. Rear Window

Defogger

A. Temperature ControlB. Fan ControlC. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Rear WindowDefogger

E. Outside Air/Recirculation

Climate Control System with Heater andAir Conditioning

Climate Control System with Heater Only

3-18

OFF: Turns the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature of the air flowing from the system.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan mustbe turned on to run the air conditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air delivery modes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument paneloutlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrumentpanel and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, withsome air directed to the rear outlets. Keep the areaunder the front seats clear to allow the flow of air to therear compartment.

É (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor, and sidewindow outlets. When this mode is selected, the systemautomatically runs the air-conditioning. To defog thewindows faster, turn the temperature control to thewarmest setting.

1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshieldof fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield andside window outlets. When this mode is selected,the system automatically runs the air-conditioning.To defrost the windows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol to the warmest setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-19

A/C (Air Conditioning): For vehicles with airconditioning, follow these steps to use the system.Turn 9 to the desired speed. The air conditioning doesnot operate when the fan control knob is in the offposition. Press A/C to turn the air conditioning on andoff. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.

2. Press ? .

3. Press A/C.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest 9 speed.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air inthe vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so a small amount of water might drip under thevehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

? (Recirculation): This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can beused to prevent outside air and odors from entering thevehicle.

For vehicles with a recirculation button, press the buttonto turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator lightcomes on to show that the recirculation is on. Press thebutton again to return to outside air mode.

For vehicles with a lever, move the lever to choose therecirculation mode.

Using the recirculation mode for extended periods maycause the windows to fog. If this happens, select thedefrost mode.

: (Outside Air): This mode brings outside air intothe vehicle.

For vehicles with a recirculation button, press the buttonuntil the recirculation mode is turned off. The vehiclethen returns to the outside air mode.

For vehicles with a lever, move the lever to choose theoutside air mode.

3-20

Rear Window and Outside MirrorDefoggerFor vehicles with a rear window and outside mirrordefogger, they only work when the ignition is turned toON/RUN.

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to removefog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn therear window and outside mirror defogger on or off.An indicator light comes on to show that the feature is on.

If the vehicle does not have air conditioning, the rearwindow defogger may turn off about 10 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If it remains on, it can be turned off bypressing < again or by turning off the engine.

If the vehicle has air conditioning, the rear windowdefogger turns off about 10 minutes after the button ispressed. The defogger can also be turned off by turningthe engine off.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach atemporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentTo open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn the cover tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

3-21

Passenger Compartment Air FilterFor vehicles with a passenger compartment air filter,it is located behind the glove box. It can be accessedafter removing the glove box from its housing.

Pollen and dust are removed by the filter. The aircleaner/filter may need to be changed periodically.

To change the passenger compartment air filter, use thefollowing steps:

1. Open the glove box halfway down.

2. Grip the glove box by both the upper and lowersides and pull it out of its housing.

3. Remove the filter cover by pressing in on thebottom retaining tab and pulling the cover down.

3-22

4. Replace the air conditioner filter.

5. View the air flow arrows on the filter before installingto ensure the filter is installed correctly.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to indicate a problem withthe vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of the gages shows theremay be a problem, check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous.

3-23

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It indicates how fast the vehicle isgoing, how much fuel is being used, and many other things needed drive safely and economically.

The vehicle’s instrument panel cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on thefollowing pages.

United States Automatic Shown, Canada and, Manual Similar

3-24

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far the vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record the number of miles, usedin the United States, or kilometers, used in Canada,traveled for up to two trips.

Cycle between the odometer and trip odometers A and Bby pressing the reset button located in the lower rightarea of the speedometer. Press the reset button to tellhow many miles or kilometers have been recorded oneither Trip A or Trip B since the trip odometer was last setback to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold thereset button. The reset button resets only the tripodometer that is being displayed. Each trip odometermust be reset individually.

TachometerThe tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operated above 6,500 rpm,the vehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Do not operate the engine with the tachometerabove 6,500 rpm.

3-25

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is startedthis light and chimecomes on and stays onfor several seconds toremind the people tofasten their safety belts.The light also beginsto flash.

This cycle repeats if the driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is already buckled, neither thelight nor chime comes on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For more information onthe airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-58.

This light comes on whenthe vehicle is started,and it will flash for afew seconds. When thelight goes out this indicatesthe system is functioningproperly.

If the airbag readiness light stays on or comes on whiledriving, the airbag system may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while driving, itmeans the airbag system might not be workingproperly. The airbags in the vehicle might notinflate in a crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

3-26

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorThe vehicle has the passenger sensing system.See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 forimportant safety information. The vehicle has apassenger airbag status indicator in the clock,located in the center of the instrument panel.

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag statusindicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, for several seconds as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the status indicator will lighteither ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let youknow the status of the right front passenger frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passengerairbag status indicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped).

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To help avoid injury toyourself or others, have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26for more information, including important safetyinformation.


3-27

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turnedon, and the engine is not running, as a check to showit is working.

It should go out when the engine is started. If it stayson, or comes on while driving, there may have a problemwith the electrical charging system. Have it checkedby your dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery. If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, turn off all accessories, such asthe radio and air conditioner to help reduce the drainon the battery.

Up-Shift LightThe vehicle may have anup-shift light.

When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear ifweather, road, and traffic conditions allow.

See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-24 formore information.

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop the vehicle. For good braking,both parts need to work.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.have the brake system inspected right away.

3-28

{CAUTION:

The brake system might not be working properly ifthe brake system warning light is on. Driving withthe brake system warning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after the vehicle hasbeen pulled off the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed for service.

This light should come on briefly when the ignition isturned to ON. If it does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parking brake does not fullyrelease. If it stays on after the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving, carefully pull off theroad and stop. The pedal may be harder to push ormay go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.


3-29

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

For vehicles with theAntilock Brake System(ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engineis started.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF or ifthe light comes on, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile driving, the vehicle needs service. See yourdealer/retailer. If the regular brake system warning lightis not on, the brakes will still work, but the antilockbrakes will not work. If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the antilock brakes will not workand there is a problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

Hold Mode LightIf the vehicle has thisfeature, this light comes onwhen the hold mode isactive.

If the HOLD mode light flashes, have the vehicle checked.See “Hold Mode” under Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-20 for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

The vehicle may have an engine coolant temperaturegage. With the ignition turned to ON/RUN, this gageshows the engine coolant temperature.


3-30

If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engineis too hot. It means that the engine coolant hasoverheated.

If the vehicle has been operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.

Tire Pressure LightFor vehicles with the tirepressure light, it comes onbriefly when the engineis started.

It provides information about tire pressures and theTire Pressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On SteadyThis indicates that one or more of the tires aresignificantly underinflated.

Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do,and inflate them to the proper pressure. See Tires onpage 5-50 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First and Then isOn SteadyThis indicates that there may be a problem with theTire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and then stays on steady for theremainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeatwith every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 5-58 for more information.

3-31

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on whenthe ignition is on, but theengine is not running,as a check to show it isworking. If it does not,have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

If the check engine light comes on and stays on,while the engine is running, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. Heeding the light can preventmore serious damage to the vehicle. This systemassists the service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven withthis light on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofthe vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during a malfunction in one oftwo ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.A misfire increases vehicle emissions and coulddamage the emission control system on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

3-32

The following can prevent more serious damage to thevehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restartthe engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soonas possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

An emission system malfunction might be corrected bydoing the following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Fillingthe Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel capallows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A fewdriving trips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deeppuddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition is usually correctedwhen the electrical system dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to runas efficiently as designed and may cause: stallingafter start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changedinto gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration. These conditionsmight go away once the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditions occurs, changethe fuel brand used. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.

If none of the above have made the light turn off, haveyour dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that might havedeveloped.

3-33

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know to help the vehicle passan inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on with the engine running, or if thekey is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if the battery hasrecently been replaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systems duringnormal driving. This can take several days of routinedriving. If this has been done and the vehicle stilldoes not pass the inspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can preparethe vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure LightIf the vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afterthe engine has beenstarted, or come onwhile driving.

This indicates that the engine is not receiving enoughoil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have someother oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by yourdealer/retailer.

The oil light could also come on in three other situations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test to show it isworking. It goes out when the ignition is turnedon. If it does not come on with the ignition on, theremay be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have itfixed right away.

• If the vehicle comes to a hard stop, the light maycome on for a moment. This is normal.

3-34

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancecan damage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Change Engine Oil LightThe vehicle may have anengine oil life system thatindicates when the oilneeds to be changed.

When the change engine oil light comes on, it meansthat the engine oil needs to be changed.

Once the engine oil has been changed, the engine oillife system must be reset. After reset, the change engineoil light goes out.

See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16, ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-13for more information.

Fog Lamp LightIf the vehicle has thisfeature, the fog lamps lightwill come on when thefog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.See Fog Lamps on page 3-14 for more information.

3-35

Cruise Control LightIf the vehicle has cruisecontrol, this light comes onwhenever the cruisecontrol is set

The light will go out when the cruise control is turnedoff. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for moreinformation.

Highbeam On LightThis light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8for more information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light turns onwhenever the DaytimeRunning Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-14 formore information.

Door Ajar LightThis light comes on andstays on until all doors,trunk and liftgate areclosed and completelylatched.

If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s door isopen, a warning chime sounds.

3-36

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage tells about how much fuel is left when theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the fuel tank is near empty, the low fuel warninglight comes on. There is still a little fuel left, but thevehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off beforethe vehicle’s fuel gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thefuel gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the fuel tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The indicator moves a little when the vehicle turnsa corner or accelerates.

• The fuel gage indicator goes back to empty whenthe ignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Warning LightThis light comes on whenthe vehicle is low on fuel.

The low fuel warning light comes on when there isapproximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuel remainingin the tank.

To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fillingthe Tank on page 5-8.


3-37

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehicle has and read thefollowing pages to become familiar with its features.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others. Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and nonaudio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,do the following while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with the operation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and presetradio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment couldinterfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and could damage them.Follow federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

3-38

AM-FM Radio

Playing the RadioO (Power/Volume): Press and release to turn thesystem on. Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to turn the system off.

Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

When the system is on, press and release O to mutethe system. Press and release O again to turn thesound back on.

Finding a StationBAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped).The display will show the selection.

u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with astrong signal in the selected band.

t SEEK: Press to seek the previous radio station witha strong signal in the selected band.

[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.

r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.

SCAN: Press to scan radio stations. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press this button again to stop scanning.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signal in theselected band.

3-39

AST (Automatic Store): Twelve preset stations withthe strongest reception in the area can be automaticallystored. The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected AM or FM band.If the Automatic Store function is started in the FMband, only FM stations are stored in preset pages A1and A2. If the Automatic Store function is started in theAM band, only AM stations are stored in A1 and A2.A combination of AM, FM and XM (if equipped) stationscan be stored manually into the other four favorite pages.

To use Automatic Store:

1. Press and hold AST to use Auto Store mode.

2. Press the pushbutton below the ON tab on theradio display.

3. Automatic Store searches for radio stations with astrong signal and automatically set presets A1 andA2 with new stations.

4. After all stations are set, press the pushbuttonbelow the arrow tab on the radio display toreturn to the main radio screen.

To reset the automatically stored radio stations, pressand hold AST. Then press the pushbutton belowthe RESE tab on the radio display. If no stations arestored on preset pages A1 and A2, the RESE optiondoes not appear in the radio display. When theAutomatic Store function is used, any stations that werepreviously set will be deleted and replaced with newstations.

Storing a Radio StationDrivers are encouraged to set up radio station favoriteswhile the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the pushbuttons, favorites button, andsteering wheel controls. See Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below theradio station frequency labels and by using the radiofavorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stations available per page.

3-40

If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favoritesare available. Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and release the FAV button to display thepage where the station is to be stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When the pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set will return.

4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for each radio stationto be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favorites pages:

1. Press and hold FAV until the radio setup menudisplays.

2. Select the desired number of favorites pages bypressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

3. Press FAV to return to the original main radio screenshowing the radio station frequency tabs and tobegin the process of programming favorites for thechosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press to adjust the bass,midrange, or treble.

Adjusting the BassTo adjust the bass:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Bass tab onthe display.

3. Turn O to adjust the setting.

4. The settings are saved after five seconds.

Adjusting the MidrangeTo adjust the midrange:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Mid tab on thedisplay.



3-41

Adjusting the TrebleTo adjust the treble:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Treb tab on thedisplay.



Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to adjust the balanceor fade.

Adjusting the BalanceTo adjust the balance:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Bal tab on thedisplay.



Adjusting the FadeTo adjust the fade:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Fad tab on thedisplay.



Setting the EQ

SOUND (Equalization): Press to select an equalizationsetting.

Setting the EQTo set the EQ:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the P.EQ tab on thedisplay. The Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz, Clastabs appear on the display.

3. Press the pushbutton below the desired selection toset the EQ. Pressing the same pushbutton againcancels the EQ setting.

3-42

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide varietyof programming and commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During yourtrial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for when you are not inthe vehicle. A service fee is required to receive theXM service. For more information, contact XM atxmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-54 later in thissection for further detail.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jack located onthe lower right side of the faceplate. This is not anaudio output; do not plug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. An external audio device suchas an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack foruse as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 4-2 for more information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUXbutton to begin playing audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.Additional volume adjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if the volume is too quiet ortoo loud.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to listen to the radio while aportable audio device is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Found maydisplay.

3-43

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press and release to turn thesystem on. Press and hold this knob for more thantwo seconds to turn the system off.

Turn to increase or decrease the volume.

When the system is on, press and release O to mutethe system. Press and release O again to turn thesound back on.

Finding a StationBAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped).The display will show the selection.

u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with astrong signal in the selected band.

t SEEK: Press to seek the previous radio station witha strong signal in the selected band.

[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.

r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.

SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio stations. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes tothe next station. The radio only scans stations with astrong signal in the selected band. Press SCAN/ASTagain to stop scanning.

3-44

Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto Store.The radio only scans stations with a strong signal in theselected band.

AST (Automatic Store): Twelve preset stations withthe strongest reception in the area can be automaticallystored. The radio will only scan stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected AM or FM band.If the Automatic Store function is started in the FMband, only FM stations are stored in preset pages A1and A2. If the Automatic Store function is started in theAM band, only AM stations are stored in A1 and A2.A combination of AM, FM and XM (if equipped) stationscan be stored manually into the other four favorite pages.

To use Automatic Store:

1. Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto Store mode.

2. Press the pushbutton below the ON tab on theradio display.

3. Automatic Store searches for radio stations with astrong signal and automatically set presets A1 andA2 with new stations.

4. After all stations are set, press the pushbuttonbelow the arrow tab on the radio display toreturn to the main radio screen.

To reset the automatically stored radio stations, pressand hold SCAN/AST. Then press the pushbuttonbelow the RESE tab on the radio display. If no stationsare stored on preset pages A1 and A2, the RESEoption does not appear in the radio display. When theAutomatic Store function is used, any stations that werepreviously set will be deleted and replaced with newstations.

Storing a Radio StationDrivers are encouraged to set up radio station favoriteswhile the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the pushbuttons, favorites button, andsteering wheel controls. See Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below theradio station frequency labels and by using the radiofavorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAVbutton to go through up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stations available per page.

3-45

If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favoritesare available. Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and release the FAV button to display thepage where the station is to be stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When the pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set will return.

4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for each radio stationto be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favorites pages:

1. Press and hold FAV until the radio setup menudisplays.

2. Select the desired number of favorites pages bypressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

3. Press FAV to return to the original main radio screenshowing the radio station frequency tabs and tobegin the process of programming favorites for thechosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)

SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press to adjust the bass,midrange, or treble.

Adjusting the BassTo adjust the bass:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Bass tab on thedisplay.



Adjusting the MidrangeTo adjust the midrange:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Mid tab on thedisplay.



3-46

Adjusting the TrebleTo adjust the treble:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Treb tab on thedisplay.



Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to adjust the balanceor fade.

Adjusting the BalanceTo adjust the balance:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Bal tab on thedisplay.



Adjusting the FadeTo adjust the fade:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the Fad tab on thedisplay.



Setting the EQ

SOUND (Equalization): Press to select an equalizationsetting.

Setting the EQTo set the EQ:

1. Press SOUND.

2. Press the pushbutton below the P.EQ tab on thedisplay. The Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz, Clastabs appear on the display.

3. Press the pushbutton below the desired selection toset the EQ. Pressing the same pushbutton againcancels the EQ setting.

3-47

XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide varietyof programming and commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During yourtrial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for when you are not inthe vehicle. A service fee is required to receive theXM service. For more information, contact XM atxmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-54 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.A CD can be loaded while the ignition is in theOFF position.

When the CD is inserted, CDP appears on the display.As the CD is loading, LOADING appears on thedisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When a CD is inthe player and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,the radio must be turned on before the CD will startplaying. When the ignition and radio are turned on,the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

[ TUNE (Next Track): Press [ TUNE to go to thenext track. The track number will appear on the display.The player will continue moving forward through theCD with each press of [ TUNE.

r TUNE (Previous Track): Press to go to the start ofthe current track. The track number will appear onthe display. The player will continue moving backwardthrough the CD with each press of r TUNE.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing.The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when listening to theradio. CDP appears on the display when the CD playerhas been selected. The CD symbol will appear onthe display when a CD is loaded.

3-48

Press CD/AUX while a CD is playing to pause the CD.PAUSE flashes on the display. Press CD/AUX againto start playing the CD.

Press CD/AUX to play a CD when listening to the audiocontents from other device (AUX mode). CDP appearson the display when the CD player has been selected.The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CDis loaded.

EJECT: Press to eject a CD. The CD can be ejectedwhen the ignition or the radio is turned off.

RPT (Repeat): Press the pushbutton under the RPT tabon the display to repeat the current track, RPT appearson the display. Press the pushbutton again to stop repeat.

RDM (Random): Press the pushbutton below the RDMtab on the display to play tracks in random, ratherthan sequential order, RDM appears on the display.Press the pushbutton again to stop random play.

INT (Scan): Press the pushbutton below the INT tabon the display to listen to the first few seconds ofeach track on the CD, INTRO appears on the display.Press the pushbutton again to stop scanning andthe current track begins to play.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscThe radio has the MP3/WMA CD-R disc capability.For more information, see Using an MP3 on page 3-51later in this section.

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CDcomes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 3-51 later in this section.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

3-49

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Care of CDsIf playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle themcarefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or otherprotective cases and away from direct sunlight anddust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of aCD while handling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft,lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make surethe wiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top ofthe CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage theCD player.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,the CD player could be damaged. While using theCD player, use only CDs in good condition withoutany label, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in thissection.

3-50

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliary input jack located onthe lower right side of the faceplate. This is not anaudio output; do not plug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. An external audio devicesuch as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, etc. can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack for use as another audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 4-2 for more information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUXbutton to begin playing audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.Additional volume adjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if the volume is too quietor too loud.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while aportable audio device is playing. Press CD/AUX asecond time for the system to begin playing audio fromthe connected portable audio player. The portableaudio device continues playing until it is turned off.

Using an MP3

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files onone disc.

• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or.wma extension, other file extensions mightnot work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and albumare available for display by the radio when recordedusing ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file namesand folder names can use more disc memory spacethan necessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file and folder names.

3-51

An MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. The system can support upto eight folders in depth, though, keep the depth ofthe folders to a minimum in order to keep downthe complexity and confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback. If a CD contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders, five sessions, and999 files, the player lets you access and navigate up tothe maximum, but all items over the maximum areignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directory isdisplayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under theroot directory are accessed prior to any other directory.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in thefile structure that contains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneath them, the playeradvances to the next folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files. The empty folderdoes not display.

No FolderWhen a CD contains only compressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. The next and previousfolder function does not function on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

When a CD contains only compressed audio files, butno folders, all files are located under the root folder.When the radio displays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayThe player play will begin from the first track under theroot directory. When all tracks from the root directoryhave been played, play will continue from files accordingto their numerical listing. After playing the last trackfrom the last folder, the player will begin playing againat the first track of the first folder or root directory.

File System and NamingThe song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without the extension (such asMP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. Parts of words on the last page oftext and the extension of the filename does not display.

3-52

Playing an MP3/WMAWith the ignition in the ON/RUN position, insert a CDpartway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls thedisc in. LOADING, and then MP3 or WMA appearson the display. The CD should begin playing. As eachnew track starts to play, the track number, and the songname will appear on the display. If the ignition orradio is turned off with a CD in the player, it will stayin the player. When a CD is in the player and the ignitionis turned on, the radio must be turned on before theCD will start playback. When the ignition and radio areturned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

Sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality,the method of recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and the way the CD-R hasbeen handled.

DIR (Directory): Press to repeat the tracks in thecurrent directory. DIR displays.

Press DIR again to repeat the tracks in all of thedirectories. ALL displays.

Press DIR again to turn off repeat play.

u SEEK t (Next/Previous Folder) (in MP3/WMAMode): Press to change the folder. If CD-R does nothave any folders, “ROOT” flashes on the display for ashort time.

[ TUNE (Next Track): Press the up TUNE arrowto go to the next track. The track number displays.The player continues moving forward through the CDeach time TUNE is pressed.

r TUNE (Previous Track): Press the down TUNEarrow to go to the start of the current track. The tracknumber displays. The player continues moving backwardthrough the CD each time TUNE is pressed.

INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press to displayadditional text information related to the currentMP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information suchas: Song Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate mightalso display.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Press this button for longer than two seconds to changedisplay mode.

SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUNDbutton for longer than two seconds. The song title orother available information of a song scrolls on/off.The offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changedonly when the SOUND button is pressed for longerthan two seconds.

3-53

XM Radio Messages

UPDATING: The encryption code in the receiver isbeing updated, and no action is required. This processshould take no longer than 30 seconds.

NO SIGNAL: The system is functioning correctly, butthe vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

LOADING: The audio system is acquiring andprocessing audio and text data. No action is needed.This message should disappear shortly.

OFF AIR: This channel is not currently in service.Tune in to another channel.

CH UNAVAILABLE: This previously assigned channelis no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If thisstation was one of the presets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0, this messagealternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

CHECK XM TUNER: If this message does not clearwithin a short period of time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If the vehicle has this feature, some audio controls canbe adjusted at the steering wheel.

PWR (Power): Press and release to turn the system onand off.

When the system is on, press and release for a shorttime to mute the system. Press and release again to turnthe sound back on.

Front View of theSteering Wheel Controls

Side View of theVolume Control

3-54

+ VOLUME −: Press the toggle bar located below the+ VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Press the left side ofthe toggle bar, below the + (plus) sign to increase thevolume. Press the right side of the toggle bar, belowthe − (minus) sign to decrease the volume.

SEEK: Press and release to go to the next presetstation.

Press and hold for a long time to go to the next AM,FM, or XM station. The radio seeks stations only with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

When playing a CD, press and release to go to thenext track. Press and hold to fast forward throughthe tracks.

MODE: Press and release this button multiple times tocycle through the audio playback options that areavailable on the vehicle. Options may include FM, AM,XM, CD, and AUX.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessorypower outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can cause stationfrequencies to interfere with each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduce these levels during thenight. Static can also occur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radio reception. When thishappens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit thatautomatically works to reduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,causing the sound to fade in and out.

3-55

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio receptionfrom coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hillscan interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling orstanding under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, ortunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with thevehicle’s radio. This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’sbattery, or simply having the phone on. This interferencecauses an increased level of static while listening tothe radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)Vehicles without OnStar® have a fixed mast antennathat can withstand most car washes without beingdamaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on the roof ofthe vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.

Backglass Antenna (Sedan)Vehicles without OnStar® have the AM-FM antennaintegrated with the rear window defogger, located in therear window. Make sure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched and that the lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna connectorat the top-center of the rear window needs to beproperly attached to the post on the glass.

3-56

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear window defogger.Repairs would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the inside rear windowwith sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window, thereis a reduced risk of damage caused by car washesand vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rear windowdefogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger gridline has been damaged. If this is true, the grid linemust be repaired.

If adding a cellular telephone to the vehicle, and theantenna needs to be attached to the glass, make surethat the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are notdamaged. There is enough space between the grid linesto attach a cellular telephone antenna without interferingwith radio reception.

Multi-Band AntennaVehicles with OnStar® have a multi-band antennathat is located on the roof of the vehicle. The antennais used for the AM/FM radio, OnStar® and theXM™ Satellite Radio Service System. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions for clear reception.If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of theAM/FM radio, OnStar®, and the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

3-57

✍ NOTES

3-58

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-3Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4Braking .........................................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6Steering ........................................................4-6Off-Road Recovery .........................................4-8Passing ........................................................4-8Loss of Control ..............................................4-8Driving at Night ............................................4-10

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-11Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-12Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-12Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-13Winter Driving ..............................................4-14If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .............................................4-17Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-18Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-18

Towing ..........................................................4-28Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-28Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-28Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-30

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andthe Vehicle

Driving for Better Fuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are somedriving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive moreslowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

• Combine several trips into a single trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Specnumber molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively isto wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Arefor Everyone on page 1-14.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance between youand the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting ininjury or possible death. These simple defensivedriving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Yourreflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annualmotor vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

4-3

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control the vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. Attimes, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires and road canprovide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.But that is only an average. It might be less with onedriver and as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space between the vehicle and othersis important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavement orgravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, oricy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is amistake. The brakes might not have time to cool betweenhard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with alot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic andallowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better braking andlonger brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakesare pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.If the engine stops, there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Oncethe power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectvehicle performance. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

4-4

Antilock Brake System (ABS)The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

If the vehicle has ABS, thiswarning light comes onbriefly when the vehicle isstarted.

The warning light is on the instrument panel cluster.See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 3-30.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, asrequired, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keepsreceiving updates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed toget a foot up to the brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle infront of you, there will not be enough time to applythe brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, evenwith ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedalpulsation might be felt or some noise might beheard, but this is normal.

4-5

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into a situationthat requires hard braking.

If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does nothave ABS, the first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hardand hold it down — might be the wrong thing to do. Thewheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannotrespond to the driver’s steering. Momentum will carryit in whatever direction it was headed when the wheelsstopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the verything the driver was trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”braking technique. This gives maximum braking whilemaintaining steering control. Do this by pushing onthe brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze thebrakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feelthe wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This helpsretain steering control. With ABS, it is different. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5.

In many emergencies, steering can help more thaneven the very best braking.

Steering

Power SteeringIf power steering assist is lost because the engine stopsor the system is not functioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tiresand the road surface, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before enteringthe curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

4-6

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot stop in time because there is noroom. That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehiclehas antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.See Braking on page 4-4. It is better to remove as muchspeed as possible from a collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or right depending on the spaceavailable.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turneda full 180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and justas quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-7

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of aroad onto the shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (aboutone-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts thepavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass.If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

4-8

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, the wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready fora second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions.

It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause thetires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If thevehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enoughpressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal downsteadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

4-9

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving becausesome drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol ordrugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because headlamps can only light upso much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But, as we get older, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-10

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or acar/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.Driving through flowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If this happens, youand other vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be very cautious abouttrying to drive through flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it haslittle or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-50.

• Turn off cruise control.

4-11

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Haveup-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-12

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get sohot that they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignitionoff is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and they could get so hotthat they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-13

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-50.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tires meet theroad probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and theroad, you can have a very slippery situation. You have alot less traction, or grip, and need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it can offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

4-14

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System(ABS), you want to brake very gently, too. If you do haveABS, see Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5. ABSimproves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Whether your vehicle has ABSor not, begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin toslide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedaldown steadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if you brake sohard that the wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brakeso the wheels always keep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allowgreater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches can appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such asaround clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under

bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while youare actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

4-15

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking the exhaust pipe. And checkaround again from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This will helpkeep CO out.

4-16

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little fasterthan just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. Thisuses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps thebattery charged. You will need a well-charged batteryto restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later onwith the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost allthe way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again andrepeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable fromthe cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuelas long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get outof the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free thevehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-18.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible and avoid going above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-69.

4-17

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutTurn the steering wheel left and right to clear the areaaround the front wheels. Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a forward gear, or with a manualtransmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to betowed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-28.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight or maximum load amount andincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options. Two labels on yourvehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

4-18

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - United States

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 5-50 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. See “Certification Label”later in this section.

Label Example

4-19

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement ‘‘The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

4-20

Item Description Total

AVehicle CapacityWeight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-21



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1,000 lbs(453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about yourvehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passenger,and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’scapacity weight.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel - Canada

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the driver’s side, centerpillar (B-pillar). This label shows the Maximum Loadamount, the number of occupant seating positions,the original equipment tires, and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure. For more informationon tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-50 andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

Example 3

Label Example

4-22

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. See “Certification Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the “Maximum Load” amount.2. Determine the combined weight of the driver

and passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from the Maximum Loadamount.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the Maximum Load amount

equals 1400 lbs (635 kg) and there will befive 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to tow atrailer.

4-23


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad, for Example 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)


300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad for Example 2 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)


Example 1 Example 2

4-24


AVehicle CapacityWeight or MaximumLoad for Example 3 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1,000 lbs(453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about yourvehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’smaximum load weight.

Example 3

4-25

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s doorlatch. This label tells you the gross weight capacityof your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Neverexceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

Label Example - United States

Label Example - Canada

4-26

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

4-27

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid vehicle damage, a platform or flatbed trailershould be used to transport this vehicle. Consultyour dealer/retailer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing the vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a deviceknown as a dolly.

Here are some important things to consider beforerecreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will be travelled? Somevehicles have restrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?See your dealer/retailer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparingthe vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on aLong Trip on page 4-12.

4-28

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with allfour wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed,a dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” thatfollows for more information.

Dolly Towing From the Front

The vehicle can be towed from the front using a dolly.To tow the vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dollymanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.

4-29

3. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in N (Neutral).

4. Set the parking brake and remove the key.

5. For an automatic transmission, insert thekey into the shift-lock release slot and shiftto N (Neutral). See Shifting Out of Park onpage 2-28.

6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

7. Release the parking brake.

Dolly Towing From the Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear withthe front wheels on the ground could causetransmission damage. Do not tow the vehicle fromthe rear with the front wheels on the ground.

Towing a TrailerDo not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is notdesigned or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer canadversely affect handling, durability and fuel economy.

4-30

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

the Vehicle .................................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-13Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-21Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-21Cooling System ............................................5-22Engine Coolant .............................................5-23

Engine Overheating .......................................5-28Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-30Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31Brakes ........................................................5-32Battery ........................................................5-35Jump Starting ...............................................5-36

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-42Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-42

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-42Headlamps ..................................................5-43Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ..........................................5-44Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

(Hatchback) ..............................................5-46Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

(Sedan) ...................................................5-46Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-47License Plate Lamp ......................................5-48Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-48

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49Tires ..............................................................5-50

Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-51Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-54Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-57

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-58Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-60Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63Buying New Tires .........................................5-64Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-66Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-66Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-68Wheel Replacement ......................................5-68Tire Chains ..................................................5-69If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-70Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-72Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-73Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-78Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-78

Appearance Care ............................................5-79Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-79Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-80Leather .......................................................5-81Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-81Interior Plastic Components ............................5-81Glass Surfaces .............................................5-82

Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-82Weatherstrips ...............................................5-82Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-82Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-83Finish Care ..................................................5-83Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-84Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-84Tires ...........................................................5-85Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-85Finish Damage .............................................5-85Underbody Maintenance ................................5-86Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-86

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-86Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-86Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-87

Electrical System ............................................5-87Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-87Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-87Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-88Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-88Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-88Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-89Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-90

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-93

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are addedto the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,traction control, and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even cause malfunction or damagenot covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from theinstallation or use of non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are not covered under theterms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuineGM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will knowthat GM-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-71.

5-3

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (includingsome inside the vehicle), many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such asairbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithiumbatteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials. Special handlingmay be necessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and the vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts,and tools before attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metric fastenerscan be easily confused. If the wrong fastenersare used, parts can later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

5-4

If doing some of your own service work, use the properservice manual. It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-15.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70.

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list themileage and the date of any service work performed.See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofthe VehicleThings added to the outside of the vehicle can affect theairflow around it. This can cause wind noise and canaffect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipmentto the outside of the vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part ofthe proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,we recommend the use of gasoline advertised asTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needsservice.

5-5

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meetCalifornia specifications. See the underhood emissioncontrol label. If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, butemission control system performance might be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-32. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determinedthat the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. In mostcases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

For customers who do not use TOP TIER DetergentGasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engineoil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectorsand intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additive recommended by GeneralMotors.

Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

5-6

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuelthat contains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated forlow emissions can contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend

against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMTcan reduce the life of spark plugs and the performanceof the emission control system could be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuel would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business inthe country where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and follow all the instructions onthe pump island. Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel orrefueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

To open the fuel filler door,pull up on the release leverwith this symbol on it. It islocated on the floor onthe outboard side of thedriver seat.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Hatchback shown. Sedan similar

5-8

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is releasedtoo soon, it will spring back to the right.

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. This spraycan happen if the tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew thecap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-82.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-32.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying the stationattendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap is needed, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get onefor you. The wrong type might not fit properly.This can cause the malfunction indicator lamp tolight and can damage the fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-32.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inthe vehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can bebadly burned and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the insideof the fill opening before operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up andinjure you even when the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others couldbe burned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood releasehandle inside thevehicle. It is located onthe lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on thesecondary hood release lever, located under thefront center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from itsretainer located on the underside of the hood.

4. Securely place the hood prop into the slot on theinner fender.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on thehood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in theinner fender and return the prop to its retainer. Lower thehood 12 inches (30 cm) above the vehicle and releaseit so it fully latches. Check to make sure the hood isclosed and repeat the process if necessary.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview

Automatic Transmission shown, Manual Transmission similar

5-12

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-13.C. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”

under Brakes on page 5-32 and Hydraulic Clutchon page 5-21.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System onpage 5-22.

E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-90.F. Battery on page 5-35.G. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-31.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-13.

I. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-19.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-30.

Engine Oil

If the engine oil pressurelight comes on, check theengine oil level right away.

The oil pressure light is on the instrument panel cluster.See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-34. Check the engineoil level regularly; this is an added reminder.

5-13

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil level at eachfuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil mustbe warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, theoil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark on thedipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommendedoil. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-93.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the proper operating range,the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range. Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen through.

5-14

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numberson an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oil hasbeen certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, where the temperaturefalls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provideeasier cold starting for the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. Always use an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of EngineOil to Use” for more information.

5-15

Engine Oil Additives / Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all that is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended andcould cause engine damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computersystem that indicates when to change the engine oiland filter. This is based on engine revolutions andengine temperature, and not on mileage. Based ondriving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. For the oil life systemto work properly, the system must be reset everytime the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A change engine oil light displays. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who will perform this work usinggenuine parts and reset the system. It is also important tocheck the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil mustbe changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil lightbeing turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key toON/RUN.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the vehicle.

If the change engine oil light comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engine oil life system hasnot reset. Repeat the reset procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a good handcleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.

2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the screws.

See Additional Required Services on page 6-6 forreplacement intervals.

5-18

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily getinto the engine, which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidCheck the automatic transmission fluid level at leasttwice a year. Add fluid if needed. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealer/retailer servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading ifyou check your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F(70°C to 80°C).

5-19

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, positionthe shift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow thesesteps:

1. Locate the automatic transmission dipstick which islocated toward the front of the engine compartment,near the power steering fluid reservoir.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

3. Push the dipstick back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pull it back out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick. The fluid shouldbe between MIN (A) and MAX (B) mark of the hotarea of the dipstick.

5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.

5-20

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the area between thetwo dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages maynot be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailerservice department and have it repaired as soon aspossible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThere is one reservoir for both the brake and thehydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 5-32for more information.

The hydraulic clutch linkage in the vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir isfilled with hydraulic fluid.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the fluid level in the master cylinderreservoir and for the proper fluid. See Owner Checks andServices on page 6-9 and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

5-21

How to Check and Add FluidThe reservoir is located near the back of the enginecompartment on the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

To check the fluid level, look on the side of the reservoir.If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the reservoir,the fluid level is correct. If the fluid does not reachthe MIN (B) mark on the reservoir, then fluid needsto be added.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engine to maintain thecorrect working temperature.

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

5-22

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® cancause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the cooling system and how tocheck and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-28.

5-23

What to Use

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system canbe dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the engine couldget too hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothingelse needs to be added. This mixture:• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),

outside temperature.• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),

engine temperature.• Protects against rust and corrosion.• Will not damage aluminum parts.• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are usedin the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in this manual for thecooling system. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level surface when checkingthe coolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surgetank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not between the Minimumand Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for moreinformation.

5-24

The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rearof the engine compartment on the driver side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiator are hot.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe between the Maximum (A) and Minimum (B) markson the coolant surge tank. The level rises at engineoperation temperature and drops again when theengine cools down.

The coolant should be between the Maximum (A) andMinimum (B) marks, when the engine is cold. If it is not,there could be a leak in the cooling system.

5-25

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause the engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood canstart up even when the engine is not running andcan cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the surge tankpressure cap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tank pressure cap, ishot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This willallow any pressure still left to be vented outthe discharge hose.

5-26

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixtureto the Maximum mark on the coolant surge tank.Wait about five minutes, then check to see ifthe level is below the mark. If the level is belowthe Maximum mark, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the Maximum mark for at leastfive minutes.

5-27

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you can feelthe upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch outfor the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower thanthe Maximum mark, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the level reachesthe mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressurecap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warn of the engineoverheating.

There is a coolant temperature gage on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 3-30.

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.

If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicleis parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage from running the enginewithout coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: If the engine catches fire because of beingdriven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

5-28

If Steam Is Coming From The EngineCompartment

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others couldbe badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

If No Steam Is Coming From TheEngine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning is displayed but nosteam can be seen or heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when the vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign ofsteam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature andto the highest fan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

If the temperature overheat gage is no longerin the overheat zone or an overheat warningno longer displays, the vehicle can be driven.

5-29

Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes.Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front ofyou. If the warning does not come back on, continueto drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park thevehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for threeminutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed,turn off the engine until it cools down.

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid reservoir is located toward thefront of the engine compartment on the driver’s sideof the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularly check power steeringfluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

The level should be between the MIN (B) and MAX (A)marks on the reservoir. If the level drops below theMIN (B) mark, add power steering fluid. Do not overfillthe reservoir and remember to replace the cap tightlywhen you are finished and clean up any spilled fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-30

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will beoperating your vehicle in an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does not cleanas well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-31

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The vehicle has onereservoir for both thebrake and clutch hydraulicsystems. It is filled withDOT 3 brake fluid.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down:

• The brake fluid level goes down because of normalbrake lining wear. When new linings are installed,the fluid level goes back up.

• A fluid leak in the brake or clutch hydraulic systemcan also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake orclutch hydraulic system fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding brake fluid doesnot correct a leak. If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too much fluid when new brakelinings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brake or clutchhydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill onthe engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned, and the vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light comes on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-28.

5-32

What to AddUse only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. This helps keepdirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutchhydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might notwork well. This could cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakeor clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,just a few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulicsystem can damage brake or clutch hydraulicsystem parts so badly that they will haveto be replaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.If you do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-82.

5-33

Brake WearThis vehicle has front disc brakes and could have reardrum brakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads areworn and new pads are needed. The sound can comeand go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,except when applying the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonthe brakes will not work well. That could lead to anaccident. When the brake wear warning sound isheard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nutsin the proper sequence to torque specificationsin Capacities and Specifications on page 5-93.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not havewear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard,have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Rearbrake drums should be removed and inspected each timethe tires are removed for rotation or changing. When thefront brake pads are replaced, have the rear brakesinspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

5-34

Brake AdjustmentEvery moderate brake stop, the disc brakes adjust forwear. If rarely making moderate or heavier brake stops,the brakes might not adjust correctly. Very carefullymaking a few moderate brake stops about every1,000 miles (1 600 km) will adjust the brakes properly.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes and the brake pedalgoes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakesmight need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up andfirmly applying the brakes a few times.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When parts of the braking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and newones are installed — be sure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might

not work properly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance expected can changein many other ways if the wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for onethat has the replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

5-35

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas thatcan explode. You can be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting on page 5-36 for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.This helps keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain thecharge of the battery over an extended period of time.

Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want touse another vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some orall of these things can hurt you.

5-36

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to the vehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involvedin the jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or a manual transmissionin N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Always turn off the radio and otheraccessories when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

5-37

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do notneed to add water to the battery installed in yournew vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have looseor missing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-38

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-39

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there, andthe chance of sparks getting back to the batteryis much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

5-40

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (–) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-41

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it isrecommended that you take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-48.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside andcan burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sure to read and followthe instructions on the bulb package.

5-42

HeadlampsTo replace a headlamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11.

2. Remove the three bolts to remove the headlampassembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from therear of the bulb.

4. Remove the headlamp cap.

5. Release the spring that retains the bulb byloosening the screw.

6. Remove the old bulb and install the new bulb.

7. Install the bulb retaining spring and tightenthe screw.

8. Reinstall the headlamp cap.

9. Reconnect the wiring harness at the rear ofthe bulb.

5-43

10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly using thethree bolts.

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

2. Remove the three bolts to remove the headlampassembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from therear of the bulb.

5-44

4. Turn the front turn signal bulb socketcounterclockwise.

5. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamphousing.

6. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwiseto remove it from the bulb socket.

7. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it inand turning it clockwise.

8. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning itclockwise.

9. Reconnect the wiring harness connector at the rearof the bulb.

10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly using thethree bolts.

5-45

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Hatchback)To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate (Hatchback) onpage 2-10 for more information.

2. Pull down on the lamp assembly while holding theend of the bracket.

3. Remove the lens cover using a flat headscrewdriver.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of thebulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Sedan)To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk (Sedan) on page 2-8 formore information.

2. Remove the two screws and the lamp housing.Disconnect the wiring harness connector beforeremoving the lamp housing.

3. Remove the five screws and the reflector assembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of thebulb holder.


6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.

5-46

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp, orback-up bulb:

1. Open the liftgate or trunk. See Liftgate (Hatchback)on page 2-10 or Trunk (Sedan) on page 2-8.

2. Remove the two screws and the lamp assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and removethe socket.

4. Press the bulb in and turn counterclockwise toremove from the socket.

5. Press the new bulb in and turn clockwise to installthe bulb into the socket.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.

7. Reinstall the lamp assembly and two screws.

Hatchback

Sedan

5-47

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of the licenseplate lamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward youthrough the opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.


5. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turnclockwise to reinstall.

6. Push and turn the license plate lamp away fromyou through the opening.

7. Reinstall the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps 94535571

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 94535587

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps 94535578

Front Sidemarker Lamps 94535578

Headlamps 94535548

License Plate Lamp 94535587

Rear Sidemarker Lamps 94535577

Rear Turn Signal Lamps 94535572

Stoplamp/Taillamps 94535577

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer/retailer.

5-48

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearor cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” for moreinformation.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper type,see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14.

Here is how to remove and replace the windshieldwiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper bladeoff the arm.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

5-49

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch flexing. You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-18.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should bechecked when your vehicle’s tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have been damaged,replace them.

5-50

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded intoits sidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded ontoboth sides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires basedon three performance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-66.

Passenger Car Tire Example

5-51

(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compactspare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-78 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 5-70.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-78 andLoading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-52

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspectratio, construction type and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporary use only.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load index and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

5-53

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-57.

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehiclewith standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), analphanumeric designator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

5-54

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-18.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressureas shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-57 and Loading the Vehicleon page 4-18.

5-55

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-66.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under Loading theVehicle on page 4-18.

5-56

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires whenthey are cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-18. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it shouldbe at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 5-78.

5-57

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or drivenno more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the propertire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handlingand stopping ability.

5-58

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumination ofthe TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system isnot operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tire pressure telltale. Whenthe system detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-60 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Industryand Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operateson a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency andcomply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




5-59

Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThis vehicle may have a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressure condition exists.If your vehicle has this feature, the TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warninglight on the instrumentpanel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning light comes on at eachignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.

The tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn offas you start to drive. This could be an early indicator thatthe tire pressures are getting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18, for an example of the tireinformation label and its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-57.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-62 and Tires on page 5-50.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tire sealant is notcovered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

5-60

TPMS Malfunction LightThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more ofthe TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on for theremainder of the ignition cycle. The low tire warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:

• One of the road tires has been replaced with thespare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DICmessage should go off once you re-install theroad tire containing the TPMS sensor.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. The TPMS malfunction light shouldgo off when the TPMS sensors are installed and thesensor matching process is performed successfully.See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than those recommended for yourvehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-64.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect orsignal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes needto be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in the followingorder: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire usinga TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer forservice.

5-61

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signsof wear or damage. See When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 5-63 for more information.

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Additional RequiredServices on page 6-6.

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achievea uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This willensure that your vehicle continues to perform mostlike it did when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63 and WheelReplacement on page 5-68 for more information.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tirerotation.

5-62

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on the tireand loading information label. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-18 for an example of the tire andloading information label and where it is located onyour vehicle. Make certain that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 5-93.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get allthe rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-70.

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditionsinfluence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when itis time for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

5-63

You need new tires if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if theyare not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsure aboutthe need to replace your tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tires that are the same size,brand, load range, speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s originaltires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-51 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This isbecause uniform tread depth on all tires will help keepyour vehicle performing most like it did when the tireswere new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affectthe braking and handling performance of your vehicle.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-62.

5-64

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with your compactspare temporarily, as it was developed for useon your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-78.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could develop cracksafter many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels onthe vehicle.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if tiresnot recommended for your vehicle are installed. Tiresthat do not match the original equipment tires couldgive a low-pressure warning that is higher or lowerthan the proper warning level you would get with originalequipment tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 5-58.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-18, for more information aboutthe Tire and Loading Information label and its locationon your vehicle.

5-65

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this may affectthe way your vehicle performs, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics, stability, and resistanceto rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, andelectronic stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle maynot provide an acceptable level of performance andsafety if tires not recommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increase the chance that youwill crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-64 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum selection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to thesystem developed by the Unites States NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements.

5-66

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (11⁄2) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law. It should be noted thatthe temperature grade for this tire is established fora tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

5-67

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned andbalanced carefully at the factory to give you the longesttire life and best overall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,the alignment might need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have theright wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensorsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

5-68

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.You cannot know how it has been used or howfar it has been driven. It could fail suddenly andcause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Install them onthe front tires and tighten them as tightly as possiblewith the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly andfollow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage your vehicle.

5-69

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pullsthe vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently braketo a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much likea skid and may require the same correction you woulduse in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment and training. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flasherson page 3-6.

5-70

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you orother people. You and they could be badly injuredor even killed. Find a level place to change yourtire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manual transmission to1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restart whilethe vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain in thevehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,you should put blocks at the front and rear of thetire farthest away from the one being changed.That would be the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explains how to use the jackand change a tire.

5-71

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe compact spare tire and tools you will need arelocated in the trunk.

A. JackB. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack HandleD. Screwdriver

(if equipped)

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk (Sedan) onpage 2-8 or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2-10.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. Remove the foam tray.

4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheelwrench from the foam tray.

5-72

5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and remove itfrom the compact spare.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-78 for more information.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing

a Flat Tire on page 5-70.2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, turn the four

plastic caps counterclockwise by hand or byusing the wheel wrench. The plastic nuts donot come off of the cover.

3. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of thejack handle. Pry along the edge of the wheel coveruntil it comes off.Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until youhave the flat tire repaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosenthem. Do not remove them yet.

5-73

5. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheelwhich the jack head fits in.

6. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fitsfirmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearestthe flat tire.

7. Put the compact spare tire near you.

Hatchback Sedan

5-74

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheelwrench onto the end of the jack handle.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get undera vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injuryand vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper location before raising thevehicle.

9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for the compact sparetire to fit underneath the wheel well.

10. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise toremove them.

11. Remove the flat tire.

5-75

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which itis fastened, can make wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.

12. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mountingsurface.

5-76

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts becausethe nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by handclockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectlytightened can cause the wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts should be tightened witha torque wrench to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torque specificationsupplied by the aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-93 for originalequipment wheel nut torque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torquespecification. See Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-93 for the wheel nut torque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence, as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’scompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, the cover or the spare couldbe damaged.

5-77

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools:

1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in thecompact spare tire compartment.

2. Secure the retainer.

3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and placethe tray back in the cargo area.

4. Replace the trim cover.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-78.

Compact Spare Tire

{CAUTION:

Driving with more than one compact spare tire ata time could result in loss of braking and handling.This could lead to a crash and you or others couldbe injured. Use only one compact spare tire ata time.

The compact spare tire was fully inflated when thevehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (414 kPa).After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and make sureyour spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis intended to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have yourfull-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.Replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon asyou can.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do nottake the vehicle through an automatic car wash withguide rails. The compact spare can get caught on therails which can damage the tire, wheel and otherparts of the vehicle.

5-78

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

Do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with otherwheels or tires. Keep your spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.Using them can damage the vehicle and can damagethe chains too. Do not use tire chains on thecompact spare.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could causestains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to home furnishings may alsotransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’supholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

5-79

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with acleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residue that streaks andattracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. thatcan damage the vehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper toweluntil no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

5-80

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaneror spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, testa small hidden area for colorfastness first. If thelocally cleaned area gives any impression that aring formation may result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heatto dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spotlifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently change theappearance and feel of the leather and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution canbe used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spotlifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercialcleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve andprotect soft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of the interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onthe instrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surfacefinish.

5-81

Glass SurfacesNotice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Glass should be cleaned often. Your dealer can providean approved cleaner, or a liquid household glasscleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dustfilms on interior glass.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severelyweaken them. In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.Check the cleaning product label. If it states thatit should not be used on plastic parts, do not use iton the vehicle or damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

5-82

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Followinstructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-82.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over a periodof years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

5-83

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommendedfor all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades ifthey are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum WheelsNotice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasivepolishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Use only approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chromepolish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface could be damaged.Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

5-84

Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes, could damage the aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drivea vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic car wash thatuses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repairedor replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will providethe corrosion protection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into majorrepair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

5-85

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areasof the frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side. It can be seen through the windshield fromoutside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and the certificatesof title and registration.

5-86

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities and Specificationson page 5-93 for the vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box. It isvery helpful if parts need to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to thevehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damagethe vehicle and the damage would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuseblock. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turnoff. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checkedright away.

5-87

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem, have itfixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When the currentload is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarilyborrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon as you can.

5-88

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on the end ofthe instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.

To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door bypulling the door out.

To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge of thefuse panel door, then push the front of the door into theend of the instrument panel to secure it.

Fuses UsageAUDIO Audio, Clock, Immobilizer

AUDIO/RKEA/C Switch, Clock, PowerMirror Unit, Audio, Anti-TheftModule, TPMS

B/UP LAMP PNP Switch, Reverse Lamp SwitchBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not Used

5-89

Fuses UsageBLANK Not UsedCIGAR Cigar Lighter

CLUSTER Brake Switch, TPMS, Anti-TheftModule

DEFOGMIRROR Power Mirror Unit, A/C Switch

RR DEFOG Rear DefogDOOR LOCK Door Lock

NA DRL NA DRL CircuitMIRROR/

SUNROOFMirror Control Switch, Room Lamp,A/C Switch

EMS 1 Engine Room Fuse Block, TCM,VSS, Fuel Pump

EMS 2 Stoplamp SwitchHORN HornOBD DLC, Immobilizer

CLUSTER/ROOM LAMP

Trunk Room Lamp, Trunk OpenSwitch, IPC, Room Lamp

SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module

Fuses UsageSOKET Power Jack

STOP LAMP Brake SwitchSUNROOF Sunroof Module (Option)

T/SIG Hazard SwitchWIPER Wiper Switch, Wiper Motor

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located on thedriver side of the vehicle, near the battery. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson the vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

To access the fuses, press in the side flaps to releasethe cover. To reinstall the cover, push the cover until it issecure.

5-90

Fuses UsageFAN HI Cooling Fan HI RelayABS-1 EBCMABS-2 EBCM

SJB BATT Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Fuses UsageACC/IG1 IGN1 RelayIG2/ST IGN2 Relay, Starter Relay

ACC/RAP Instrument Panel Fuse BlockP/WINDOW-2 Power Window Switch

5-91

Fuses UsageP/W

WINDOW-1 Power Window Switch

FAN LOW Cooling Fan LOW RelayA/CON A/C Compressor Relay

PKLP LHTail Lamp (LH), Side Marker (LH),Turn Signal & Parking Lamp (LH),License Lamp

PKLP RHTail Lamp (RH), Side Marker (RH),Turn Signal & Parking Lamp (RH),License Lamp, I/P Fuse Block

ECU ECM, TCMFRT FOG Front Fog Lamp RelayF/PUMP Fuel Pump RelayHAZARD Hazard Switch, Hood Contact Switch

HDLP HI LH Head Lamp (LH), IPCHDLP HI RH Head Lamp (RH)

IPC IPCHDLP LO LH Head Lamp (LH), I/P Fuse BlockHDLP LO RH Head Lamp (RH)

EMS-1 ECM, InjectorDLIS Ignition Switch

EMS-2EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid,Thermostat Heater, HO2S,MAF Sensor

SPARE Not Used

Relays UsageF/PUMPRELAY Fuel Pump

STARTERRELAY Starter

PARK LAMPRELAY Park Lamp

FRONT FOGRELAY Fog Lamp

HDLP HIGHRELAY Head Lamp High

HDLP LOWRELAY Head Lamp Low

FAN HIGHRELAY Cooling Fan High

FAN LOWRELAY Cooling Fan Low

A/CON RELAY Air ConditionerENGINE MAIN

RELAY Main Power

ACC/RAPRELAY I/P Fuse Block

IGN-2 RELAY Ignition

Misc. UsageFUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

5-92

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System 6.7 qt 6.3 LEngine Oil with Filter 4.8 qt 4.5 LFuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 LTransmission, Automatic 6.2 qt 5.87 LTransmission, Manual 1.9 qt 1.8 LWheel Nut Torque 81 lb ft 110 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.6L L4 6 Automatic andManual 0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)

5-93

✍ NOTES

5-94

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warrantyand Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer fordetails.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual arenecessary to keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep thevehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affectthe quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels orthe wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and tokeep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintainthe vehicle properly.

6-2

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you will driveit. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather. You might use thevehicle in making deliveries. Or you might driveit to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits on the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can bedangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can beseriously injured. Do your own maintenance workonly if you have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. If you haveany doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unlessyou are technically qualified and have the necessaryequipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine parts.

To purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-15.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells whatshould be checked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keep the vehicle in goodcondition.

6-3

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the change engine oil light displays, service isrequired for the vehicle. Have the vehicle servicedas soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter must be changed atleast once a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work using genuineparts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last service. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed. See for informationon the Engine Oil Life System and resetting thesystem.

When the change engine oil light displays, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the following for“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first service be Maintenance I, thesecond service be Maintenance II, and then alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance II may be required moreoften.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the changeengine oil light displays within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the change engine oil lightdisplays 10 months or more since the last service or ifthe message has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-18. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-62 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 6-9.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. Add fluid as needed. • •Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l). •Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. • • • • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service only). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. Not to exceed37,500 miles (60 000 km).

• • • • • •

Inspect EVAP canister and vapor lines.Replace EVAP vent solenoid valve.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote †.

• • •

6-6

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belts.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (g).

• • • • • •

Replace timing belt. •Replace fuel filter. An Emission ControlService. See footnote †. •

Replace power steering pump accessorydrive belt. • • •

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering cables forproper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.

6-7

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-49 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-84 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checkingthe Restraint Systems on page 1-72.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges andlatches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hingesand latches. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

(g) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,the fluid and filter do not require changing.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired andthe fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filtermay require replacement more often.

6-8

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,dependability, and emission control performance. Yourdealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to thevehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-23.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflatedto the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the sparetire, if the vehicle has one. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-57. If the vehicle has a spare tire, check tomake sure it is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 5-70.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileage highwaydrivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-62.

6-9

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The starter should work onlyin P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in anyother position, your vehicle needs service.For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift leverin Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway,and try to start the engine. The starter should workonly when the clutch pedal is pushed down allthe way to the floor. If the starter works when theclutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,your vehicle needs service.

6-10

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parked on alevel surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-26 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), your vehicle needs service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

• For manual transmission vehicles, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press thekey release button.

On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only inLOCK/OFF.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. Itshould only lock when turned to the right.

6-11

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle couldbegin to move. You or others could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-13.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-23

6-12


Hydraulic BrakeSystem

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

WindshieldWasher Solvent Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

AutomaticTransmission

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,in Canada 22689186).

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ManualTransmissionShift Linkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

6-13

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Maintenance Replacement PartsPart GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96536696 A3081C

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 —

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 96962173 —

Spark Plugs 96476119 —

Wiper Blades - Hatchback

Driver Side 96476652 —

Passenger Side 96476656 —

Rear 96301840 —

Wiper Blades - Sedan

Driver Side 96476652 —

Passenger Side 96476656 —

6-14

Engine Drive Belt Routing

6-15

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-5Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..........................7-14Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-15Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17OnStar® ......................................................7-18Navigation System ........................................7-18Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-18

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with thesales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concernhas not been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns can bequickly resolved at that level. If the matter has alreadybeen reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,contact the owner of the dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, in theU.S., call the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at1-800-762-2737. In Canada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order togive your inquiry prompt attention. Have the followinginformation available to give the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, remember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why wesuggest you follow Step One first.

7-2

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motorsand your dealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, ifyou continue to remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can filewith the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileageand other factors. General Motors reserves the rightto change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

7-3

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event thatyou do not feel your concerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-charge Mediation/ArbitrationProgram. General Motors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,should be completed in approximately 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), calltoll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

7-4

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/pontiacInformation and services customized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warranty information,and more

• Online service and maintenance records

• Find Pontiac dealers for service nationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specific vehicle

• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earningssummaries

Other Helpful Links:Pontiac — www.pontiac.com

Pontiac Merchandise — www.pontiacmall.com

Help Center — www.pontiac.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.caMy GM Canada is a password-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can save information onGM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

• My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as addressand phone number for each of your preferred GMdealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts andservice estimates, check trade-in values, orschedule a service appointment by adding thevehicles you own to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use toolsand forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section withinwww.gm.ca.

7-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. cancommunicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT(7668). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-6

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743); (Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance, have the followinginformation ready:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

7-7

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles(160 000 km), whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.In Canada, a person driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is not covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at anytime without notification.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to limit services or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is made many times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel

for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock thevehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must present identificationbefore this service is given.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:Tow to the nearest Pontiac dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannotbe driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change aflat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jumpstart a dead battery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If yourtrip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warrantyperiod. Items considered are hotel, meals, andrental car.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.• Legal fines.• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,

chains, or other traction devices.• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a

non-public road or highway.

7-8

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately

$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of NorthAmerica are provided when requested either withthe most direct route or the most scenic route. Thereis a limit of six requests per year. Additional travelinformation is also available. Allow three weeks fordelivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Mustbe over 250 kilometres from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorizationhas been received, the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangements and explain how toreceive payment.

• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot beprovided right away, the Roadside Assistanceadvisor may give you permission to get localemergency road service. You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by the warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle forservice, you are urged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for the same day repair.

7-9

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybridspecific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished with eachnew vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide youwith shuttle service to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used instead of thedealer’s shuttle service, the expense must besupported by original receipts and can only be up tothe maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service.

7-10

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle thatyou obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and mustbe supported by original receipts. This requires that yousign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usage charges and mayalso be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every dealer. Please contact your dealerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by a qualified technicianusing the proper equipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish yourvehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

7-11

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with thesame materials and construction methods as the partswith which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choice to ensure that yourvehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are from undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safety performance, however,the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are notcovered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany related failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These aremade by companies other than GM and may not havebeen tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure relatedto such parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies provide reduced protection toyour GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend thatyou assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM originalequipment collision parts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your current insurance carrier,consider switching to another insurance carrier.If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Readyour lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

7-12

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you are all right. If youare uninjured, make sure that no one else in yourvehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you in danger or you areinstructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frameof mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-7 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card from thetow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep these itemsin your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you through theinformation they will need. If they ask for a policereport, phone or go to the police departmentheadquarters the next day and you can get a copy ofthe report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not benecessary. This is especially true if there are noinjuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retaileror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

7-13

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, takeyour vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts orrecycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled partswill not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value the repairusing aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Rememberif your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from safercar.gov.

7-14

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

7-15

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:


Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example, yourvehicle uses computer modules to monitor and controlengine and transmission performance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in acrash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking tohelp the driver control the vehicle. These modules maystore data to help your dealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modules may also store data abouthow you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. These modules may alsoretain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radiopre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

7-16

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltswere buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recordedby the EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) is recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipmentis required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if they have accessto the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required by law.Data that GM collects or receives may also be used forGM research needs or may be made available to othersfor research purposes, where a need is shown and thedata is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

7-17

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on data collection and use.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-18

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-71Additional Required Services, Scheduled

Maintenance ................................................. 6-6Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-87Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-18Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 3-22Airbag

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-26Airbag System ................................................ 1-58

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle ................................................... 1-71

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-63Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-65Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-63What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-64When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-62Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60

AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-27

AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-39Antenna

Backglass ................................................... 3-56Fixed Mast ................................................. 3-56

Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5Warning Light ............................................. 3-30

Appearance CareAluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-84Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-82Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-86Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-83Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-80Finish Care ................................................. 5-83Finish Damage ............................................ 5-85Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-82Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-81Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-79Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-81Leather ...................................................... 5-81Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-85Tires .......................................................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-82Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-82Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-84

Ashtray ......................................................... 3-17

1

Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7Audio System ................................................. 3-38

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-54Radio with CD ............................................ 3-44

Audio SystemsRadio Reception .......................................... 3-55

Automatic TransmissionFluid .......................................................... 5-19Operation ................................................... 2-20

BBackglass Antenna .......................................... 3-56Battery .......................................................... 5-35

Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-15Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-15Brake

Emergencies ................................................ 4-6Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-32Brakes .......................................................... 5-32

Antilock ....................................................... 4-5Parking ...................................................... 2-26System Warning Light .................................. 3-28

Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6

Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-48

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-46Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-14Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-44Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-42Headlamps ......................................... 5-42, 5-43License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-48Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-47Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64

CCalifornia

Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4California Fuel .................................................. 5-6California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications ............................ 5-93Carbon Monoxide

Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-30Liftgate ...................................................... 2-10Trunk .......................................................... 2-8Winter Driving ............................................. 4-14

2

Care ofSafety Belts ................................................ 5-82

CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-51Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-46Central Door Unlock System .............................. 2-6Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-69Charging System Light .................................... 3-28Check

Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-32Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-86Child Restraints

Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-36Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-44Older Children ............................................. 1-32Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-51Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-54Systems ..................................................... 1-39Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-42

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17Circuit Breakers .............................................. 5-88Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-84Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-83Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-80

Cleaning (cont.)Finish Care ................................................. 5-83Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-82Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-81Interior ....................................................... 5-79Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-81Leather ...................................................... 5-81Tires .......................................................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-82Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-82Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-84

Climate Control System ................................... 3-18Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21

Clock ............................................................ 3-17Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-21Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-78Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-15Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4Coolant

Engine ....................................................... 5-23Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-30

Cooling System .............................................. 5-22Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7-10Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10

3

Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-36Cupholders .................................................... 2-37Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6

Offices ......................................................... 7-6Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6

Customer InformationService Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2

DDamage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-11Data Recorders

Event ......................................................... 7-17Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-14Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-36Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-51Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15Door

Ajar Light ................................................... 3-36Ajar Reminder .............................................. 2-7Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-6Locks .......................................................... 2-6Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-7

DriverSeat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-5

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-10Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-12Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunk .......................................................... 4-3Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-13In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-11Loss of Control ............................................. 4-8Off-Road Recovery ........................................ 4-8Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-18Winter ........................................................ 4-14

Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2

EEDR ............................................................. 7-16Electrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-87Electrical System

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-90Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-88Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-87

4

Electrical System (cont.)Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-89Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-88Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-88

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-35Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-32Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12Coolant ...................................................... 5-23Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-30Cooling System ........................................... 5-22Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15Exhaust ..................................................... 2-30Oil ............................................................. 5-13Oil Life System ........................................... 5-16Overheating ................................................ 5-28Starting ...................................................... 2-18

Engine Heater ................................................ 2-19Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-17Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-32Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18Finish Damage ............................................... 5-85Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-56Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-70Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-78Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19Power Steering ........................................... 5-30Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31

Fog LampFog ........................................................... 3-14

Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-35Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8

5

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-37Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6Low Fuel Warning Light ................................ 3-37

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-90Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-88Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-89Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-88

GGage

Speedometer .............................................. 3-25Tachometer ................................................. 3-25

GagesEngine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-30Fuel .......................................................... 3-37Trip Odometer ............................................. 3-25

GasolineOctane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-6

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-37GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7

HHalogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-42Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-2Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-42Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-87Headlamps .................................................... 5-43

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-42Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-14Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-44High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8

Heater ........................................................... 3-18Engine ....................................................... 2-19

Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-5Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-36Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-13Hold Mode Light ............................................. 3-30Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

6

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-20Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-21

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-17Immobilizer .................................................... 2-13Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-14Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-15Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-36Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-57Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-15Cluster ....................................................... 3-24Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Introduction ...................................................... 6-2

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-36

KKeyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-4Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-51Lamp

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32Lamps

Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-14Dome ........................................................ 3-15License Plate .............................................. 5-48

Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-28LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-44Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ........................................ 2-10Lights

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-26Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-30Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-35Charging System ......................................... 3-28Cruise Control ............................................. 3-36Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-36Door Ajar ................................................... 3-36Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-35Highbeam On ............................................. 3-36High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8Hold Mode ................................................. 3-30

7

Lights (cont.)Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-37Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-34Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-27Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-26Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-31Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-28

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-18Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-6Door ........................................................... 2-6Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-7

Loss of Control ................................................ 4-8Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-37Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-44Lumbar

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5

MMaintenance

Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-3Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-32Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5Manual Seats ................................................... 1-4Manual Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-21Operation ................................................... 2-24

Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-32Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-33Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-33Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-32Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-33

MP3 ............................................................. 3-51

8

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-25Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25Off-Road

Recovery ..................................................... 4-8Oil

Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-35Engine ....................................................... 5-13Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-16Pressure Light ............................................. 3-34

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-34Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-16

OutsideConvex Mirror ............................................. 2-33Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-33Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-32Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-33

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-85Park

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-27Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28

ParkingOver Things That Burn ................................. 2-30

Parking Brake ................................................ 2-26Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-29Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-27Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-22Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-65Passing ........................................................... 4-8Perchlorate Materials Requirements,

California ..................................................... 5-4

9

PowerElectrical System ......................................... 5-88Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-30Windows .................................................... 2-12

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-31Privacy .......................................................... 7-16

Navigation System ....................................... 7-18OnStar ....................................................... 7-18Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-18

Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ...................................................... 7-18Radios

AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-39Radio with CD ............................................ 3-44Reception ................................................... 3-55

Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-7Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-8, 1-11Rear Window Washer/Wiper ............................. 3-10Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-32Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12

Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-28Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ..................................................... 2-4Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-73Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-72Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-48Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-15General Motors ........................................... 7-15

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government .................................. 7-15

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States Government ............................ 7-14

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-72Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-73Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-18Roof

Sunroof ...................................................... 2-38Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-31

10

SSafety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-26Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-82Extender .................................................... 1-32How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-20Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-28Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-14Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-31

Safety DefectsReporting to General Motors ......................... 7-15Reporting to the United States Government ..... 7-14

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6Scheduling Appointments ................................... 7-9Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-5Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-8, 1-11Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ...................................... 1-51Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-54

Service ........................................................... 5-3Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of the

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-32Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15Scheduling Appointments ................................ 7-9

Service Parts Identification Label ....................... 5-87Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-70Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-85Shifting

Out of Park ................................................ 2-28Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-27Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7Spare Tire

Compact .................................................... 5-78Installing .................................................... 5-73Removing ................................................... 5-72Storing ....................................................... 5-78

Specifications and Capacities ............................ 5-93Speedometer .................................................. 3-25Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-18Steering .......................................................... 4-6Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-54Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6

11

Storage Areas ................................................ 2-37Cupholders ................................................. 2-37Glove Box .................................................. 2-37Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-38

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-17Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-13Sunroof ......................................................... 2-38

TTachometer .................................................... 3-25Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps ....................................... 5-47

Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-13

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-15Immobilizer ................................................. 2-13Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-14

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time ............................................................. 3-17Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-31Tires ............................................................. 5-50

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-84Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64Chains ....................................................... 5-69

Tires (cont.)Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70Cleaning .................................................... 5-85Compact Spare ........................................... 5-78Different Size .............................................. 5-66If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-70Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-57Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-73Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-60Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-58Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-73Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-72Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-51Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-78Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-54Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-66Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-68Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-68When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-28Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-30Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-28

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-21

12

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-20Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-24Transportation, Courtesy .................................. 7-10Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25Trunk .............................................................. 2-8Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-66Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-28

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-4Loading ...................................................... 4-18Parking Your ............................................... 2-29Running While Parked .................................. 2-31Symbols ......................................................... iii

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16Vehicle Data Recording,

Radio Frequency (RFID) ............................... 7-18

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-86Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-87

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21Visors ........................................................... 2-13

WWarning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-23Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-68Different Size .............................................. 5-66Replacement ............................................... 5-68

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-63Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-42Windows ....................................................... 2-11

Manual ...................................................... 2-12Power ........................................................ 2-12

13

WindshieldWasher ........................................................ 3-9Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-31Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-49Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-84Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-88Wipers ......................................................... 3-8

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-14Wipers

Rear Washer .............................................. 3-10

XXM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-54

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2009 Pontiac G3 Owner Manual M...On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès de...

Documents

Transcript of 2009 Pontiac G3 Owner Manual M...On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès de...